X1 E84 Owners Manual 5131

Owner's Handbook for Vehicle

The Ultimate Driving Machine

Contents A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG


X1 sDrive18i X1 xDrive25i X1 xDrive 28i X1 sDrive18d X1 xDrive18d X1 sDrive 20d X1 xDrive 20d X1 xDrive 23d

Owner's Handbook for Vehicle Congratulations on your choice of a BMW. The better you are acquainted with your vehicle, the easier you will find driving it to be. We would therefore like to offer you the following advice: Please read the Owner's Handbook before setting out in your new BMW. You will receive important notes on how to operate the vehicle, enabling you to derive maximum benefit from the technical advantages of your BMW. You will also receive useful information that will help you to uphold both the vehicle's operating safety and its full resale value. Supplementary information is provided in the other documents of on-board literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable journey, BMW Group


© 2010 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Not to be reproduced, wholly or in part, without written permission from BMW AG, Munich. English II/10, 03 10 500 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.


Cockpit iDrive Voice control system

Controls 26 37 45 50 61 73 86 91 95

Opening and closing Adjusting Child safety Driving Everything under control Technical features for driving comfort and safety Lights Climate Interior equipment

Refuelling Fuel Wheels and tyres Engine compartment Routine maintenance work General care Replacing parts Breakdown assistance

224 Technical data 229 For Australia/New Zealand 232 Short commands for the voice control system 238 Maintenance overview 242 From A to Z

Driving hints 108 Driving precautions

Navigation 118 119 129 135

Navigation system Destination input Route guidance What to do if ...

Entertainment 138 141 145 148 155 160

Overview

Reference

On/off and settings Radio Digital radio DAB CD/DVD player and CD changer Music collection External devices


Navigation

10 16 21

190 192 193 197 202 204 207 216

Entertainment

Overview

Controls

Mobility

Notes

Communication

4

166 Telephone 178 s 181 BMW Services

Mobility

About this Owner's Handbook

Communication

Reference

The quickest access to a particular topic or item is by consulting the detailed alphabetical index, see page 242.

Driving hints

Contents

Notes

Notes About this Owner's Handbook We have tried to make all the information in this Owner's Handbook easy to find. The quickest access to a specific topic or item is by consulting the detailed alphabetical index at the end. Consult the first chapter for an initial overview of your vehicle. When the time comes to sell your BMW, please to hand over this Owner's Handbook; it is an important part of the vehicle.

Additional sources of information Your Service will be happy to advise you if you have any further questions. Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects, can also be found on the Internet on www.bmw.com.

Symbols used Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.< Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.< Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.< < Marks the end of a specific item of information.

* Identifies optional extras or specific nationalmarket items of equipment, as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing. "..." Identifies texts on the control display for selecting functions.. {...} Identifies commands for the voice control system. {{...}} Identifies replies by the voice control system.

Symbol for components and assemblies Recommends that you study the relevant section of this Owner's Handbook in connection with a particular part or assembly.

4 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

For your own safety Built-date* Your BMW has a 'built-date information' at the partition wall in the engine compartment. The 'built-date' is defined as 'the calendar month and the calendar year in which the body shell and the powertrain subassemblies are coned and the vehicle is driven or moved from the production line'.

Status at time of printing The high safety and quality standards of BMW vehicles are maintained by unceasing development work on designs, equipment and accessories. In rare instances, your vehicle may therefore differ from the information supplied in the Owner's Handbook.

For customers in Australia/New Zealand As you read this manual, please bear the following in mind: to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards, we at BMW pursue a policy of continuous,

Your vehicle is configured for the operating conditions and registration requirements of your country. If the vehicle is to be operated in another country, your vehicle must be adapted to any prevailing different operating conditions and permit requirements. Information on possible exclusion of warranty or warranty restrictions for your vehicle can be obtained from your Service Centre.

Routine maintenance work and repairs The advanced technology behind this vehicle, for example the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, means that specially adapted methods of maintenance and repair are required. Always have the necessary work on your BMW performed either by BMW Service or by a workshop that operates to BMW specifications and has suitably trained personnel. If such work is performed inexpertly, it could result in consequential damage and thus constitute a safety risk.<


Overview Controls Driving hints

If you have any queries, your Authorised BMW Dealer will be glad to advise you.

Navigation

In right-hand drive vehicles, some of the controls are arranged differently from those shown in the illustrations of this Owner's Handbook.<

Entertainment

Should your BMW feature equipment which is not described in this Owner's Handbook, please refer to the Supplementary Owner's Handbooks supplied with your vehicle.

Communication

This explains why the Owner's Handbook may also contain details of items which you have not ordered. The differences can easily be identified by the asterisk * shown against optional extras.

Mobility

When you ordered your BMW, you chose various items of equipment. This Owner's Handbook describes all models and equipment specifications which BMW offers within this particular model line.

ongoing development. Because modifications in the design of both vehicles and accessories may be introduced at any time, your own vehicle's equipment may vary from that described in this manual. For the same reason, it is also impossible to guarantee that all descriptions will be completely accurate in all respects. We must therefore request your understanding of the fact that we are unable to recognise legal claims based on discrepancies between the data, illustrations and descriptions in this manual and your own vehicle's equipment. Please note, too, that some of the optional equipment described in this manual is not available on Australian models due to restrictions imposed by Australian Design Rules and other requirements.

Reference

Your individual vehicle

Notes

Parts and accessories BMW recommends using parts and accessory products on this vehicle that are specifically approved for this purpose by BMW. You are recommended to consult BMW Service for advice on Genuine BMW parts and accessories, other BMW-approved products and competent advice on all related matters. The safety and compatibility of these parts and products in conjunction with BMW vehicles have been checked by BMW. BMW accepts product liability for them. BMW cannot accept liability for parts or accessory products of any kind which it has not approved. BMW is unable to assess each individual product of outside origin as to its suitability for use on BMW vehicles without safety risk. This suitability cannot be guaranteed even if an official permit has been issued for the particular product in a specific country. Tests performed for such permits cannot always cover all operating conditions for BMW vehicles, and some of them therefore are insufficient.<


7

Reference


Mobility

Communication

Entertainment

Navigation

Driving hints

Controls

Overview


Overview This summary of buttons, switches and displays serves as an initial guide. In addition, it gives you an insight into the principles behind the various ways in which functions can be performed.


Cockpit

Cockpit Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

1

Safety switch for electric rear windows 35

2

Window lifts 34

3

Operating the outside mirrors 42

4

Lights

5

Steering-lever stop, left Flashing turn indicators 56 High-beam headlights/headlight flasher 88

Headlight beam throw adjustment* 88

High-Beam Assistant* 88

Side lights 86

Parking lights* 88

Low-beam headlights 86

Computer 63

Automatic driving lights control* 86 Adaptive Head Light* 87 High-Beam Assistant* 88

Settings and information about the vehicle 65 Instrument lighting 90

Fog lights 89 Rear fog lights 89


Telephone*: Receiving and ending a call; starting dialling* for a selected phone number; redialling if no phone number is selected

15 Lever for speed control Cruise control* 59 16 Open tailgate* 30 17 Releasing the engine compartment lid 197

Volume control

Shift paddles* 55

8

Instrument cluster 12

9

Buttons on the steering wheel, right

Driving hints

Activating/deactivating voice control system* 21 7

Navigation

Change radio station interrupt traffic reports select audio track Change TV programme Browsing the redial list

Entertainment

Next entertainment source Recirculated-air mode 92

Switching the ignition on/off and starting/stopping the engine 50

Communication

10

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel, left

Controls

6

11 Steering-lever stop, right Windscreen wipers 56 Rain sensor* 57

12 Ignition lock 50 13 Horn, entire surface 14 Adjusting steering wheel 43


Reference

Mobility

Rear window wiper 58

Cockpit

Instrument cluster

1

Speedometer

2

Indicator and warning lights 13

> Position of automatic gearbox* 54

3

Revolution counter 61

> Hill Descent Control* 79

4

Engine oil temperature* 62 Energy Control* 62

> Computer 63

5

Display for

6

Display for

> Date of next scheduled service, and remaining driving distance 66

> Clock 61

> Distance recorder – odometer – and trip distance recorder 61

> Outside temperature 61

> High-Beam Assistant* 88

> Indicator and warning lights 69

> Checking engine oil level* 198

> Display for speed control* 59

> Settings and information 65 >

There is a Check Control message 69

> Gearshift point display* 64 7

Fuel gauge 62

8

Resetting trip distance recorder 61


The principle

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding light comes on.

Indicator lights without text messages

Overview

Indicator and warning lights

High-beam headlights/ headlight flasher 88 Fog lights 89

Controls

The following indicator lights indicate that specific functions are active:

Indicator and warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colours.

DSC or DTC 79

Some lights are checked for proper functioning and thus come on briefly when the engine starts or the ignition is switched on.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC 78

Driving hints

Rear fog lights* 89

Flashing turn indicators 56 Run Flat Indicator RPA 80

You can call up additional information, e.g. about the possible cause of a fault and about what corresponding measures should be taken, via Check Control, see page 69.


Reference

Mobility

Communication

Text messages at the top of the Control Display explain the meaning of the indicator and warning lights being shown.

Entertainment

Engine malfunction with degradation of the emissions 203

Navigation

Handbrake applied 53

Explanatory text messages

Cockpit

Around the centre console: controls and displays

1

Roof lining 15

2

Control Display 16

3

Air outlets 93

4

10 Controller with buttons 16

Hazard warning flashers 216 Central locking system 30

5

Automatic air conditioning system 91

6

Glove box 98

7

Radio and CD/DVD drive* 138

8

Park Distance Control PDC* 73 Rear-view camera* 75 Hill Descent Control HDC* 79 Deactivating the automatic start/ stop function* 52 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 39

9

Gearshift lever for manual transmission 54 Selector lever for automatic transmission 54 14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

2

Panorama glass roof* 35

3

Indicator light* front enger airbags 85

4

Reading lights 90

5

Interior lights 90

Entertainment

SOS: initiating an emergency call* 216


Reference

Mobility

Communication

1

Navigation

Driving hints

Controls

Overview

Comprehensive information on the roof lining

iDrive

iDrive The principle iDrive integrates the functions of a large number of switches. These functions thus can be controlled from one central point.

Switching off 1. Press the OPTION button. 2. "Switch off control display"

Only make adjustments if the traffic conditions are sufficiently quiet or clear, so as not to endanger the vehicle's occupants and other road s by being distracted.<

Overview of controls Controls

Switching on Press the controller to switch on.

Controller Select menu items and adjust settings. 1. Turn.

1

Control Display

2

Controller with buttons The buttons can be used to call up menus directly. The controller is used to select menu items and adjust settings.

Control Display > Information. Please observe information on cleaning the Control Displays, see page 206.

2. Press

> Do not place items in front of the Control Display to avoid damage to the Control Display.


Overview

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

Calls up the main menu

RADIO

Calls up the 'Radio' menu

CD

Calls up the CD/Multimedia menu

NAV

Calls up the 'Navigation' menu

A new menu is displayed or the function is executed.

Menu items in the Owner's Handbook In the Owner's Manual the menu items to be selected are displayed in inverted commas, e.g. "Settings".

TEL

Calls up the 'Telephone' menu

BACK

Displays the previous menu

Switching between screens

OPTION

Calls up the 'Options' menu

After selecting a menu items, e.g. "Radio", a new menu is displayed on a board. These screens can lie one on top of the other.

Operating principle

Jog the controller to the left or right to switch between the screens.

Calling up the main menu Press the MENU button. The main menu is displayed.

White arrows to the left or right indicate that other screens can be called up.

Mobility

All the functions of iDrive can be called up via the main menu.

Navigation

MENU

2. Press controller.

Entertainment

Function

Communication

Button

Selecting a menu item Menu items in white can be selected by highlighting them.


Reference

Buttons on the controller

Driving hints

Controls

3. Jog in four directions

iDrive

Calling up the 'Options' menu

An example: setting the clock

Press the OPTION button. The "Options" menu is displayed.

1. Press the MENU button. The main menu is displayed. 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is highlighted and press the controller.

Other possibility: jog the controller to the right until the "Options" menu is displayed. The following is shown in the "Options" menu: > Screen settings, see page 16.

3. Turn the controller until "Clock/Date" is highlighted and press the controller.

> Operating options for the selected menu.

Adjusting settings 1. Select a field. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed.

4. Turn the controller until "Time:" is highlighted and press the controller.

3. Press the controller to confirm the setting. The scrollbar on the right-hand side indicates whether other menu items or settings that are not visible at the moment can be selected.<

5. Turn the controller to set the hour and press the controller. 6. Turn the controller to set the minute and press the controller.


Switching split screen on and off* 1. Press the OPTION button. 2. "Split screen" The split screen view is switched on.

Overview

Status information

With the split screen switched on, you can select the displayed content. 1. Jog the controller repeatedly to the right until the split screen content is selected. Time

2

Display for: >

2. Select the display. Driving hints

1

Reception level of mobile telephone network, depending on mobile phone

> Incoming and outgoing, missed call > Receiving an SMS* Display for:

> "TP": Traffic Programme is on. > No display: Traffic Programme is switched off. Other displays: Status information is temporarily hidden during Check Control message displays or inputs via the voice control system*.

Certain iDrive functions can be memorised on the favourites buttons and called up directly, e.g. radio stations, navigation destinations, telephone numbers and jumps into the menu.

Storing a function 1. Highlight the function via iDrive. 2.

... Press the desired button for longer than 2 seconds.

Example of favourites buttons

Professional navigation system: split screen

Switching voice instructions for navigation on/ off.

In the split screen view, additional information can be displayed in the right-hand section, e.g. information from the on-board computer.

1. "Navigation"

This information remains visible in the split screen view even if a switch is made to another menu.

2. "Map" 3. Use the controller to select the 4.

symbol.

... Press the desired button for longer than 2 seconds.

Running a function ...

Press the button. 19


Entertainment

Sound output switched off or display for traffic announcements*:

Communication

4

Favourites buttons

Mobility

> Telephone*: Name of the mobile phone logged in to the vehicle

Navigation

> Entertainment: Radio, CD/DVD, external devices, TV*

Reference

3

Controls

Select display for split screen content*

iDrive

The function is run immediately. This means that e.g. on selection of a telephone number the connection is also established.

Displaying the assignment of the buttons Touch the buttons with your finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects.

Displaying brief info ...

Touch the button.

The assignment of the buttons is displayed at the top edge of the screen.

Switching between letters and digits Depending on the menu, you can switch between the input of letters and digits: Symbol

Function

To enter letters To enter digits

Input matching for navigation Input of names and addresses: the selection is gradually narrowed down and possibly supplemented with every subsequent letter that you enter. Destination search: inputs are continuously compared with the data stored in the vehicle. > Only letters for addresses that have data are offered during input. > Town/city names can be entered in the syntax of all the languages available on the Control Display.

Displaying detailed information ...

Touch the button for longer.

Letters and digits Entering letters and digits 1. Turn the controller: selects letters or digits. 2. If applicable, select other letters or digits. 3. "OK": confirm the input. Symbol

Function

Press the controller: deletes a letter or digit Press and hold down the controller: deletes all numbers or letters Enters a space


Condition Via iDrive, select the language in which the voice control system is operating, so that the spoken commands can be identified. Selecting the language for iDrive, see page 72.

Symbols in the Owner's Handbook {...} Enunciate commands shown in this form precisely as given. {{...}} Identifies the replies by the voice control system.

Speaking commands Activating voice control 1. Press the

button on the steering wheel.

This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal indicate that the voice

Ending or interrupting voice control Press the or

button on the steering wheel

{Cancel} In dialogues where any text can be spoken, cancelling is only possible using the button on the steering wheel.

Possible commands The commands that are possible in each case depend on the selected menu item on the Control Display. To have possible commands read aloud: {Voice commands}

or

{Help}

For instance, if you have selected "CD", the available commands for operating the CD/Multimedia will be read out.


Driving hints

Controls This symbol appears on the Control Display if further commands can be given. If no further commands are possible, continue by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.

Navigation

The voice control system includes a special microphone positioned near the interior mirror, see page 14.

2. Say the command. The command appears on the Control Display.

Entertainment

The voice control system translates your commands into control signals for the system in question, and assists you by means of announcements or questions.

Communication

Most of the menu items on the Control Display can be called up as voice commands. It is not necessary to use the controller.

Mobility

The voice control system enables you to operate various items of equipment on your vehicle without having to take your hands off the steering wheel.

control system is ready to receive spoken commands.

Reference

The principle

Overview

Voice control system*

Voice control system

Calling up functions immediately using short commands Short commands enable you to perform certain functions immediately irrespective of which menu item is selected, see page 232.

An example: selecting a track from a CD 1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio output. 2. Press the


3. Select a music track, e.g.: {CD track 4} The system says: {{Track 4}}

Setting the speech dialogue You can set whether the system uses the standard dialogue or the short variant. With the short variant of the voice dialogue, the commands and responses of the system are shortened.

> Do not use the voice control system for emergency calls. In stress situations, the spoken language and voice pitch can change. This delays establishment of a telephone connection unnecessarily. > Say the commands and numbers fluently and at normal volume; avoid unnatural emphases and pauses. This also applies to spelling out and saying an entire word for destination input. > When selecting a radio station, use the standard pronunciation of the station name. > When making entries in the voice-activated phone book, use only names in the language of the voice control system, and do not use abbreviations. > Keep doors, windows and panorama glass roof* closed to avoid noise interference from outside the vehicle. > Avoid causing background noise in the vehicle while you are speaking.

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Speech mode:"

4. Select a setting: > "Standard" > "Short"

Notes More information about voice control of the telephone appears on page 174.< When using the voice control, note the following: 22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

23

Reference


Mobility

Communication

Entertainment

Navigation

Driving hints

Controls

Overview


Controls This chapter enables you to operate your vehicle with greater ease. All equipment items that are of relevance for driving and make your journey safer and more comfortable are described here.


Opening and closing

Opening and closing Remote control/key Scope of delivery

In addition, information about service requirements is stored in the remote control, see Service data in the remote control, page 202.

Integrated key

Two remote controls with key.

Buttons on the remote control

Press button 1 to release the key. The integrated key fits the following locks: > Keyswitch for front enger airbags*, see page 85 > Driver's door, see page 29

New remote controls Additional remote controls with integrated key or replacements in case of loss are available from your Service. 1

Releasing

2

Locking

3

Open the tailgate

Personal Profile The principle

General Every remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the vehicle is being driven. Drive a longer distance with each remote control at least twice annually in order to maintain battery charge. If your vehicle is fitted with convenient access*, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, see page 34. The settings called up and implemented when the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the vehicle, see Personal Profile, next column.

You can set many of your BMW's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. Without any action on your part, Personal Profile ensures that most of these settings are saved for the remote control currently in use. When you unlock the vehicle the remote control used for the purpose is recognised and the settings saved for it are called up and implemented. This means that your personal settings will be activated for you, even if in the meantime your BMW was used by someone else with another remote control and the corresponding settings.


The central locking system functions when the driver's door is closed.

> Automatic locking of the vehicle, see page 30

The following are unlocked or locked in combination:

> Automatically calling up* the driver's seat position, see page 40

> Doors

> Settings for display on the Control Display and in the instrument cluster:

> Tailgate > Fuel filler flap

> Via the remote control

> Date format, see page 69

> With convenient access* by means of the handles on the driver's and the front enger's door

> Brightness, see page 72 > Language, see page 72 > Units of measure, see page 65 > Park Distance Control PDC*: visual warning, see page 74 > Rear-view camera*: > Select functions, see page 75 > Type of display, see page 77 > Light settings:

> Via the door lock*

Locking/unlocking simultaneously using the remote control: > Deadlock* is also activated/deactivated. Doors cannot be opened with the safety lock buttons or the door handles. > Welcome lights, interior lights and ground lights* are activated/deactivated.

> Welcome lights, see page 86

> Alarm system*, see page 31, is engaged disengaged.

> Headlight courtesy delay feature, see page 87

Operating from inside

> Daytime driving lights, see page 87

By means of the button for central locking, see page 30.

> High-Beam Assistant, see page 88 > Automatic air conditioning system: activating/deactivating AUTO program, cooling function and Automatic Air Recirculation Control, setting temperature, air flow rate and distribution, see page 91 onwards

Overview

Operating from outside

> 12-hour/24-hour format of the clock, see page 69

If the vehicle was locked from inside, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked*. In the event of a severe accident the central locking unlocks automatically. Hazard warning lights and interior light are switched on.


Navigation

> Triple turn signal, see page 56

Controls

The principle

> Response of the central locking system when the vehicle is unlocked, see page 28

Driving hints

Central locking system

Entertainment

> Assignment of the favourites buttons, see page 19

Communication

For more information on specific settings, see the pages referred to.

> Tone settings, see page 138 > Speed-dependent volume control, see page 139

Mobility

Personal Profile settings

> Entertainment:

Reference

The individual settings are memorised for a maximum of four remote controls; in the case of convenient access*, for two.

Opening and closing

Opening and closing: from the outside With the remote control General Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets left inside can lock the doors from the inside. You should therefore take the remote control with you when you get out of the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from the outside.<

Unlocking Press the

button.

Vehicle is unlocked. You can select how to open your vehicle. 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. "Unlock button"

Locking Press the

button.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there is someone inside it, as it cannot then be unlocked from the inside in some national-market versions and with certain special equipment.<

Convenient closing Hold the button pressed. Windows and the panorama glass roof* are closed. Watch the closing movement to ensure that no one is trapped. The closing procedure is interrupted if the button is released.<

Switch on interior light, ground lights* and welcoming lights While the vehicle is locked: Press the button. This function also enables you to locate the vehicle, for instance in a parking garage.

Unlocking the tailgate Press the

button for approx. 1 second.

The tailgate opens a short distance, regardless of whether it was locked or unlocked.

4. Select a menu item: > "All doors" Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle. > "Driver's door only" Press the button once to unlock the driver's door and the fuel filler flap. Press it twice to unlock the entire vehicle.

On certain national-market versions, the tailgate cannot be opened unless the vehicle has been unlocked. The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when opened. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance. To prevent being locked out inadvertently, do not place the remote control in the luggage area. If the tailgate had been locked before it was opened, it is locked again as soon as it is closed. Before and after each trip, check that the tailgate has not been inadvertently unlocked.<


Confirmation signals

Convenient opening

You can activate or deactivate the confirmation signals.

Hold the button pressed. Windows and the panorama glass roof* are opened.

1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks"


4. Press controller. Flashing on locking/unlocking is switched on.

Malfunctions The remote control may malfunction as a result of interference from local radio signals. If this occurs, unlock and lock the vehicle at the door lock with the integrated key. If the vehicle does not have an alarm system* or convenient access*, only the driver's door can be unlocked and locked at the door lock by means of the integrated key. If the vehicle can no longer be locked with a remote control, the battery in the remote control is flat. Use this remote control for a longer trip so that the battery is recharged, see page 26. The remote control for convenient access* contains a battery that might have to be replaced, see page 34.

Via the door lock General

To lock all the doors, the fuel filler flap and the tailgate together: 1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle by means of the central locking button in the enger compartment, see page 30. 2. Unlock and open the driver's or the front enger's door, see page 30. 3. Lock the vehicle. > Lock the driver's door at the door lock, using the integrated key, or > Press down the safety lock button of the front enger's door and close the door from outside.

Convenient operation The alarm system* or convenient access* allow you to operate the windows and the panorama glass roof* with the door lock.

Opening/closing Hold the key in the unlocking/locking position when the door is closed. Monitor the closing procedure and make sure no one is trapped.<

Overview Controls

If the vehicle is not fitted with an alarm system* or convenient access*, only the driver's door can be locked at the door lock.<

Driving hints

Unlock the vehicle with the remote control or insert the remote control into the ignition lock up to the stop to deactivate the triggered alarm.

Navigation

In some national-market versions the alarm* system is triggered, see page 31, if the vehicle is unlocked using the door lock.

Entertainment

national-market versions and with certain special equipment.<

Communication

3. "Visual signal lock/unlock"

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there is someone inside it, as it cannot then be unlocked from the inside in some 29 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Reference

In the event of an electrical defect, use the integrated key to unlock or lock the driver's door lock.

Mobility

Manual operation

Opening and closing

Opening and closing: from the inside

Unlocking and opening > Either unlock the doors together using the central locking button and then pull the door handle above the armrest or > Pull the door handle out twice at any door: the first pull unlocks the door, the second one opens it.

Locking > Either lock all doors at once via the central locking button, or

Unlocking and locking Press button inside the vehicle. Doors and tailgate are locked/unlocked if the front doors are closed. However, the deadlock is not activated. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked*.

Automatic locking You can set how to lock the vehicle: 1. "Settings"

> Press down the safety lock button of a door. To prevent that you are shut out of the vehicle accidentally, the driver's door cannot be locked with the safety lock button when it is open. Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets left inside can lock the doors from the inside. You should therefore take the remote control with you when you get out of the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from the outside.<

Tailgate

2. "Door locks" 3. Select the desired function: > "Automatic relock" Central locking is activated after a short period of time if no door was opened. > "Lock after drive away" Central locking is activated as soon as you drive off.

The function is switched on and is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Opening The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when opened. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance.

Opening from inside*

Press the button. The tailgate is opened when the vehicle is stationary if it has not been secured.


Closing

Press the button, see arrow, or press the button on the remote control for a longer period of time. The tailgate will open slightly. It can now be swung upwards.

The recessed handles in the interior trim of the tailgate make it easier to pull the tailgate down.

2. From the luggage compartment, press out the handle in the tailgate, see arrow, and pull out to the stop. The tailgate is unlocked.

The alarm system reacts if: > Opening a door, the engine compartment or the tailgate. > There is any movement inside the vehicle: Interior movement detector, see page 32. > Changing the inclination of the vehicle, e.g. when attempting to steal wheels or to tow away. > Interrupting the battery voltage. The alarm system will respond briefly to unauthorised attempts to access the car as follows: > An acoustic alarm > Switching on the hazard warning lights

3. Open the tailgate from the outside and press the handle in again. The tailgate is closed again as soon as it is closed.

Controls Driving hints Navigation

The principle

Entertainment

1. Fold down the rear seat back rest, see Enlarge luggage compartment on page 101.

Alarm system*

Communication

In the event of an electrical fault:

To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing area of the tailgate is unobstructed.<

Arming and disarming Whenever the vehicle is locked or unlocked, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.


Mobility

Opening manually

Before closing the tailgate, make sure that the floor in the luggage compartment is not tilted upwards, see page 104.

Reference

On certain national-market versions, the luggage compartment lid/tailgate cannot be opened with the remote control unless the vehicle has been unlocked.<

Overview

Opening from outside

Opening and closing

Door lock when alarm system is armed On certain national-market versions, unlocking via the door lock triggers off the alarm. This type of alarm system can only be disarmed using the remote control.

Tailgate when alarm system is armed The tailgate can be opened with the remote control also when the alarm system is armed. Press the button on the remote control.

> Indicator light flashes after unlocking (for a maximum of approx. 5 minutes) until the remote control has been inserted into the ignition lock: Alarm was triggered.

Panic mode* Trigger the alarm when in danger: Press the remote control for at least three seconds. To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Closing the tailgate locks it and arms the alarm. The hazard warning lights flash once.

Tilt alarm sensor

On certain national-market versions, the luggage compartment lid/tailgate cannot be opened with the remote control unless the vehicle has been unlocked.

Alarm system reacts, e.g. in an attempt to steel wheels or to tow away.

Switching off an alarm > Unlock the vehicle with the remote control, see page 28. > Insert the remote control fully into the ignition lock.

Indicator light on the interior mirror

Inclination of the vehicle is monitored.

Interior movement detector Windows and panorama glass roof* must be closed for correct operation.

Avoiding false alarms Tilt alarm sensor and interior protection can be deactivated tly, e.g. in the following situations: > In duplex garages > When being transported on vehicle-carrying trains, boats/ships or trailers > When animals are in the vehicle

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior movement detector Press the button on the remote control twice in succession. > Indicator light flashes every 2 seconds: The system is armed.

Indicator light lights up for approx. 2 seconds and subsequently continues to flash.

> Indicator light flashes after locking: Doors, engine compartment or tailgate are not closed correctly, the rest is locked.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior movement detector are switched off until the car is next locked.

Afterwards indicator light flashes after approx. 10 seconds. Interior movement sensor is not activated. > Indicator light goes off after unlocking: The vehicle was not tampered with.


The vehicle automatically detects the remote control near or on the inside of the vehicle. Convenient access s the following functions: > Unlocking/locking the vehicle > Unlocking the tailgate individually

Touch the area in the door handle, arrow 2, with the finger for approx. 1 second. Corresponds to pressing

button.

> Convenient closing

To preserve the vehicle battery, make sure that the ignition and all consumers are switched off before locking.

Operating requirements

If a remote control is detected on the inside, you cannot lock or unlock.

> The remote control must be outside of the vehicle to lock it.

Convenient closing

> Locking/unlocking is only possible after approx. 2 seconds.

Press and hold down the area, arrow 2, with the finger.

> It is only possible to start the engine if the remote control is in the vehicle.

Windows and the panorama glass roof* are also closed.

Comparison with ordinary remote control

Unlocking the tailgate individually

> Starting the engine

The listed functions can be operated by using the remote control or convenient access.

Press the button on the outside of the tailgate, see page 31. Corresponds to pressing

button.

If the vehicle detects that a remote control has been left inside the vehicle or in the luggage compartment, the tailgate opens again.

Releasing

Ignition on The ignition is switched on by pressing the Start/stop button.

Driving hints

It is enough to carry the remote control, e.g. in the jacket pocket.

Navigation

Access to the vehicle without operating the remote control.

Entertainment

The principle

Controls

Overview

Locking

Communication

Convenient access*

Corresponds to pressing

button.

Starting the engine The engine may be started or the ignition turned on if a remote control is on the inside of the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert the remote control in the ignition lock, see page 50.


Reference

Put your hand right round the handle of the driver's or the front enger's door, arrow 1.

Mobility

Do not depress the brake or clutch, otherwise the engine will start.

Opening and closing

Switching off the engine in vehicles with automatic gearbox

1. Remove the integrated key from the remote control, see page 26.

The engine can be switched off only when the selector lever is in position P, see page 52. To switch off the engine with the selector lever in position N, the remote control must be in the ignition lock.

Malfunction The function of the convenient access may be disturbed by local radio waves. In this case, open or close the vehicle with the door lock using the buttons on the remote control or with the integrated key. You can subsequently start the engine by inserting the remote control into the ignition lock.

Warning lights If the warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when you attempt to start the engine: the engine cannot be started. The remote control is not in the vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote control with you into the vehicle or have it checked. If applicable, try inserting a different remote control into the ignition lock.

2. Remove the cover. 3. Insert a new battery with the plus side up. 4. Press the cover back into position. Dispose of the old battery at a collection point or return it to Service.<

Window lifts General Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children could operate the window lifts and possibly injure themselves.<

If the warning light in the instrument cluster comes on while the engine is running: the remote control is no longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is then switched off, it can be restarted only within approx. 10 seconds. If the indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on and a message appears on the Control Display: change the battery in the remote control.

Changing the battery The battery in the remote control for convenient access requires replacement from time to time.

Opening Press the button as far as the pressure point. The window opens for as long as the switch is pressed down. Press the switch beyond the pressure point. The window opens automatically. The process is stopped by pressing the button again.


The process is stopped by pressing the switch. Convenient operation, see page 28, using the remote control or door lock. Convenient closing, see page 33, for convenient access*.

After having switched off the ignition You can still operate the windows for approx. 1 minute after the remote control has been removed or the ignition switched off.

Press the button. LED lights up when the safety function is switched on. Press the safety switch when carrying children on the rear seats, otherwise careless closing of the windows could result in injury.<

General

Despite the trap protection function, make sure that the windows are not obstructed as they close; if this precaution is not taken, the risk remains that thin objects, for instance, could fail to interrupt the closing movement. Do not attach any accessories in the movement range of the windows in order not to impair the trap protection function.<

To avoid injuries, watch the glass roof while closing and ensure that the closing area of the glass roof is unobstructed.< Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children could operate the roof and possibly injure themselves.<

Communication

If the closing force exceeds a certain value during closing, the process is aborted.

Closing without the trap protection function E.g. in the event of an external hazard or if the windows are iced up that prevents a normal closure, proceed as follows: 1. Pull and hold the switch beyond the pressure point. The trap protection function is restricted and the window opens slightly when the closing force exceeds a certain value.

Overview

Panorama glass roof* The glass roof and the sliding trim can be operated individually or together with the switch.

Trap protection

Controls

The window closes automatically.

Driving hints

Pull the switch beyond the pressure point.

This enables you to prevent the rear side windows from being opened and closed at the switches in the rear seat area, for instance by children.

Navigation

The windows close for as long as the switch is held upwards.

Safety switch

Entertainment

Pull the switch up to the pressure point.

The window closes without trap protection.

Lifting the glass roof Press the switch briefly. From the closed position, the roof is raised and the sliding trim opens slightly.


Mobility

To avoid injuries, watch the windows closing and ensure that the closing area is unobstructed.<

2. Pull and hold the switch past the pressure point again within approx. 4 seconds.

Reference

Closing

Opening and closing

Do not close the sliding trim forcibly with the roof in the raised position, as this would damage the mechanism.<

risk remains that thin objects, for instance, could fail to interrupt the closing movement.<

Press the switch to the front beyond the pressure point to close the glass roof and the sliding trim completely.

Closing without the trap protection function

Opening/closing the sliding trim

1. Press and hold the switch to the front beyond the pressure point.

Press and hold the switch up to the pressure point in the desired direction. Sliding trim moves as long as you hold the switch.

E.g. proceed as follows if there is external danger:

The trap protection function is restricted and the roof opens slightly when the closing force exceeds a certain value.

Press the switch beyond the pressure point in the desired direction.

2. Press the switch to the front beyond the pressure point again and hold until the roof closes without active trap protection.

Sliding trim moves automatically. Touching the switch stops the movement.

Initialising after power cut

Opening/closing glass roof and sliding trim together

It is possible that the roof may only be lifted after a power cut. Have system initialised by your Service.

Press the switch beyond the pressure point twice in the desired direction. Glass roof and sliding roof move together. Stop the movement by pressing the switch again. Convenient operation, see page 28, using the remote control or door lock. Convenient closing, see page 33, for convenient access*.

After the ignition is switched off You can still operate the roof for approx. 1 minute after the remote control has been removed or the ignition switched off.

Trap protection If the closing force exceeds a certain value during closure of the glass roof, the closing procedure is stopped as from the centre of the roof opening or during closure from raised position. The roof is subsequently opened a little. Despite the trap protection function, make sure that the roof is not obstructed as it closes; if this precaution is not taken, the 36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

A seated position that suitably reflects your requirements is a vital condition of relaxed driving with a minimum of fatigue. In the event of an accident the seat position plays an important role in combination with: > Seatbelts, see page 41

forward or back to make sure it engages properly.

Height Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Backrest

Driving hints

> Head restraints, see page 39

Overview

Safe seated position

Controls

Adjusting

> Airbags, see page 83

Seats

Entertainment

Jog*

Adjusting manually

Mobility

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Communication

Do not lean the backrest of the front enger's seat backwards when the vehicle is moving. Otherwise there is the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in the event of an accident. The protective effect of the seatbelt is lost.<

Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Longitudinal direction Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired position. After releasing the lever, move the seat gently


Reference

Do not adjust the driver's seat when driving. The seat could move unexpectedly, leading to the driver losing control of the vehicle, so that an accident could be caused.<

Navigation

Before adjusting, note

Adjusting

Thigh *

Lumbar *

Pull the lever and move the thigh forward or back.

The seat back contour can be altered to the lordosis, the curvature of the lumbar section of the spine.

Electrical adjustment

The upper edge of the pelvis and the spinal column are ed, to encourage an upright but relaxed seated position. > To increase or reduce the curvature: press the switch at front or rear. > To move the curved section up or down: press the switch at top or bottom.

Backrest width* 1

Longitudinal direction*

2

Height

3

Jog*

You can change the width of the backrest to suit your individual preferences by adjusting the lateral- pads. 4

Backrest

The head restraints are adjusted manually, see Head restraints below.

Press the switch at front or rear. Backrest width decreases or increases accordingly.

Adjusting the rear seat backs Adjustment of the backrest inclination, see page 101.


Rear

Correctly adjusted head restraints

Adjusting height

Overview

Head restraints A correctly positioned head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as near to the back of the head as possible.

> Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down. The centre head restraint is not height-adjustable.

Removing at the front and back

Front Adjusting height

Only remove the head restraints if no person is travelling in the corresponding seat. 1. Pull up all the way. 2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint all the way out while the rear seat backrest is slightly folded forward.

Communication

Install the head restraints before carrying persons, otherwise there is no protective function of the head restraint.<

Seat heating*

> Up: pull.

Navigation

Distance

> Up: pull.

Mobility

> Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

Switching on Press once per temperature stage. Highest temperature stage when three LEDs light up. 39 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Reference

Adjust the headrest so that its centre is approx. at the height of the ears.

Entertainment

Height

Driving hints

Controls

Adjust the head restraint to the correct height on all occupied seats, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury during an accident.<

Adjusting

Switching off

Calling up

Press and do not immediately release the button. LEDs go off.

Do not call up memory while you are driving, as unexpected seat movement could result in an accident.<

If you continue the journey within approx. 15 minutes, seat heating is activated automatically at the temperature last set.

Convenience function

If necessary, the temperature is reduced - up to and including switching off - to prevent battery discharge. The LEDs stay lit up.

Seat and mirror memory* General

1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch on radio ready state, see page 50. 2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1 or 2. The setting is automatically moved to the final position. The adjusting procedure is halted immediately when you press a seat adjustment switch or touch one of the memory buttons.

Two different driver's seat and rear-view mirror positions can be saved and called up. Settings for the seat back width and lumbar are not stored in memory.

Safety function

Memorising

2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 until the adjusting procedure is completed.

1. Close the driver's door and switch the ignition on or off, see page 50.

If the button was pressed accidentally: Press the button again; the LED will go off.

Calling up with the remote control The driver's seat position last set is stored for the remote control currently in use. You can select whether the seat is reset to that position automatically. 1. Switch on the radio ready state or the ignition, see page 50. 2. Adjust the seat and outside mirrors to the desired positions. 3. Press the button. LED in the button lights up. 4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2. LED goes off. The driver's seat and outside mirror positions are stored for the remote control currently in use.

When this Personal Profile function is used, first make sure that the footwell behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles. Otherwise, persons could be injured or objects could be damaged should the seat start to move towards the rear.< The adjusting procedure is halted immediately when you press a seat adjustment switch or touch one of the memory buttons.

Selecting automatic call-up 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks"


Deactivate "Last seat position automatically".

Seat belts General Fasten the seatbelt on every occupied seat before each journey. The airbags are a complementary safety feature and not a substitute for the seat belts.

Number of seat belts Your vehicle has five seat belts for your safety and the safety of your engers. However, they can offer protection only when used correctly. > The upper belt anchorage is suitable for adults of any stature as long as they are sitting correctly. > Both rear buckles, integrated into the rear enger compartment are designed for engers sitting on the left and right. > In the rear enger compartment, the centre belt buckle marked CENTER is solely intended for the rear centre enger. > If the rear centre seat belt is used, the left backrest must be locked into position, see page 101, otherwise the centre seat belt will not have any restraining effect.

Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis, or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable. Wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided. Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consistent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have been designed. A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer. Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing by polishes, oils and chemicals and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water. The belt should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged. Belts should not be worn with straps twisted. It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has been worn in a severe impact even if damage to the assembly is not obvious.< No modifications or additions should be made by the which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.< Never restrain more than one person with each seat belt. Babies or small children must not travel on the lap of another occupant.< Fasten the seat belt firmly and without twisting it over pelvis and shoulders as near to the body as possible and making sure in 41



Switching off automatic call-up

To release the seat belt, press the button on the buckle catch unit.

Navigation

Automatic call-up of the last seat position is switched on and is stored for the remote control currently in use.

The length of the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itself automatically to allow freedom of movement.

Entertainment

Adjustment of the belt length is very important. To adjust the lap belt and check whether the buckle has locked correctly, pull upwards on the shoulder strap until the lap belt fits tightly.

Communication

Draw the buckle tongue attached to the seat belt across the body and press it into the buckle catch until a 'click' is heard.

Mobility

Adjustment for automatic retracting seat belts

Reference

3. "Last seat position aut."

Adjusting

the pelvic area that it is situated on the hip and does not press on the stomach. Otherwise the belt can slide over the hip in the event of a headon collision and injure the stomach. The seat belt must not across the neck. It should not be pulled across sharp edges or routed or fastened over hard or fragile objects.< Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull the belt taut in the upper body area, otherwise its restraining effect could be impaired.<

Fastening the buckle

Damaged seat belts If the seat belts have been exposed to loads in an accident or damaged in any way: Replace the seat belt system and the belt tensioner and have the belt anchorage checked. Check and replace the seat belts. Have the repair work carried out only by your Service otherwise the correct function of the seat belt system cannot be ensured.<

Mirrors Outside mirrors General Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not gauge your distance from following traffic based on what you see in the mirror; otherwise there is an increased risk of accident.<

The seat belt buckle must be heard to engage.

Overview

Opening the buckle 1. Hold onto the belt. 2. Press the red button on the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back up to the reel.

Fasten seat belt reminder for driver's and front enger's seat* The indicator light comes on and an acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a message will appear on the Control Display. Check whether the seat belt has been fastened correctly. The 'Fasten seat belts' reminder is issued as long as the driver's seat belt has not been fastened. The 'Fasten seat belts' reminder is also activated at road speeds above approx. 8 km/h, approx. 5 mph, if the front enger's seat belt is not fastened, if objects are placed on the front enger seat, or if driver or front enger unfasten their seat belts.

1

Adjusting

2

Folding outside mirrors in and out*

3

Left/right, parking position function*

Selecting a mirror Switching to another mirror: Slide the mirror switch.

Electrical adjustment Analogue to the button movement.


Seat and mirror memory, see page 40.

Inside mirror Reducing the dazzling effect

Adjusting manually

Overview

Storing the positions*

Press on the edges of the mirror pane in the event of an electrical defect, for example.

Driving hints Navigation

The parking position function is deactivated during trailer towing*. To deactivate: Slide the mirror switch in the front enger position.

Folding in and out* Press button 2.

Two photo cells control the unit:

Possible up to 20 km/h or 13 mph.

> In the mirror pane, see arrow

Can be of advantage, e.g.

> On the back of the mirror

> In the car wash

For proper functionality:

> In narrow streets

> Keep photo cells clean

> To fold manually folded mirror out again.

> Do not cover the area between the inside mirror and the windscreen

Before driving into a car wash, fold the mirrors in manually or with the button, otherwise they could be damaged due to the width of the vehicle.<

Steering wheel

Automatic heating

General

Depending on the outside temperature, both outside mirrors are automatically heated while the engine is running or the ignition switched on.

Do not adjust the steering wheel position while the vehicle is in motion, or an accident may result from any unexpected movement.<


Entertainment

2. Engage reverse gear or selector lever position R.

Inside and outside mirrors, automaticdim*

Communication

1. Slide the mirror switch into the driver position.

From the back when driving at night: turn the button.

Mobility

To activate:

Reference

If the vehicle is in reverse gear, the mirror pane on the front enger side tilts slightly to the bottom. This increases the view of the kerb or other obstructions near the ground, e.g. when parking.

Controls

Parking position function*

Adjusting

Adjusting

1. Fold lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seated position. 3. Swing the lever back up. Do not use force to swing the lever back up; otherwise the mechanism will be damaged.<

Electrical steering wheel lock* The steering wheel locks or unlocks automatically when the remote control is removed or inserted, see page 50.


Always carry children at the rear Accident research has shown that the safest place for children is on the rear seats. Children under 12 years of age or smaller than 150 cm, approx. 5 feet, should always travel on the rear outer seats using suitable child restraint systems, otherwise there is a greater risk of injury in the event of an accident.<

Not for Australia/New Zealand: children on the front enger seat Please make sure that the front and the side airbags on the front enger side have been turned off if it becomes necessary to use a child restraint system on the front enger seat. The front enger airbags cannot be deactivated unless the vehicle is fitted with a keyswitch for the front enger airbags, see page 85. If you are using a child restraint system on the front enger side, the front enger airbags must be deactivated, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury to the child, even with a child restraint system.<

When selecting, installing and using child restraint systems, observe the manufacturer's instructions, otherwise the protective effect could be impaired.< Following an accident, have all components of the child restraint system and the seat belt that was used to secure it checked by BMW Service and replaced if necessary. Have this type of work carried out only by your Service.<

For Australia/New Zealand: installation of child restraint systems Since your vehicle is equipped with a front airbag system for the front enger's seat, the following warning is applicable: It is recommended not to use any kind of child restraint system on the front enger's seat.


After installing the child restraint system move both rests to the front, if applicable, so the rests are slightly in with the child restraint system.

Navigation

In general, the front enger's seat and rear outer seats are suitable for the installation of universal child restraint systems for all age groups, provided these have been approved for the age group in question.

Adapt the inclination of the centre rest and the respective outside rest before fitting child restraint systems on the rear outer seats.

Entertainment

Not for Australia/New Zealand: suitable seats

A corresponding child restraint system is available from your Service for any age group or weight category.

Extreme Hazard Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it, as otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of the airbag deploying.<


Mobility

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, as they could otherwise endanger themselves and/or other persons by opening the doors, for example.<

Fitting child restraint systems

Reference

Important considerations

Communication

Child safety

Child safety

Not for Australia/New Zealand: on the front enger's seat Make sure that the front and side airbags on the front enger side are switched off before installing a child restraint system on the front enger seat. If you are using a child restraint system on the front enger side, the front enger airbags must be deactivated, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury to the child, even with a child restraint system.<

Seat position and height Before fitting a universal child restraint system on the front enger's seat, move the seat backwards and upwards as far as it will go in order to achieve the best possible routing of the seat belt. Please do not change the position and seating height afterwards.

Suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems The following ISOFIX child restraint systems may be used on the rear outer seats. The respective categories (letters) or ISO data is stated on the child restraint system. On the rear seats

A - ISO / F3

D - ISO / R2

B - ISO / F2

E - ISO / R1

B1 - ISO / F2X

F - ISO / L1

C - ISO / R3

G - ISO / L2

Brackets for lower ISOFIX anchors Make sure that both of the lower ISOFIX anchors are correctly locked in place and that the child restraint system is seated firmly against the backrest, as otherwise the protective effect can be diminished.<

Backrest width* Before installing a child restraint system on the front enger seat, open the backrest width completely, see page 38. Do not change the width of the backrest afterwards. The backrest width must be completely open before installing a child restraint system on the front enger seat. Do not change the setting afterwards, otherwise the stability of the child restraint system is restricted.<

The brackets for the lower ISOFIX anchors are located beneath the labelled caps. Before installing an ISOFIX child restraint system pull out the seat belt from the area of the child restraint system anchors.

Not for Australia/New Zealand: child seat mountings, ISOFIX Note When you are fitting and using ISOFIX child restraint systems, comply with the operating and safety instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system, as otherwise the protective effect can be diminished.<


3. Hook in the hook for the retaining strap into the lashing eyes. 4. Pull the retaining strap taut. 5. Push the head restraint into its lowermost position. For ISOFIX child restraint systems with an upper retaining strap there are two additional mounting points, see arrows.

For Australia/New Zealand: child restraint systems

Use the mounting points for the upper ISOFIX retaining strap only to secure child restraint systems; otherwise, the mounting points could be damaged.<

In accordance with ADR 34/01, provisions have been made to allow installation of a child restraint system at each rear seating position.

Guiding the retaining strap

Please refer strictly to the installation instructions supplied with the child restraint system. Each seating position is fitted with a head rest.

Mounting points

Direction of travel

2

Head restraint

3

Luggage compartment floor

4

Hook for the upper retaining strap

5

Mounting points/lashing eyes

6

Seat backrest

7

Upper retaining strap

The child restraint anchor fittings, see arrows, are located at the rear of the seat backs of the second seat row.

Routing of the strap on the outer seating positions Do not route the strap of the child restraint system over the head rest or over sharp edges and do not twist the strap, as 47


Overview Reference

1

Mobility

Communication

Make sure that the upper retaining strap does not over sharp edges and is not twisted on its path to the upper mounting point. Otherwise the child restraint system cannot protect the child as intended in the event of an accident.<

The attaching clip which is part of the upper anchorage strap of a child restraint system – AS 1754 – can be attached directly to the corresponding anchor fitting.

Controls

2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the head restraint posts.

Driving hints

1. Push the head restraint upwards.

Navigation

Mounting points

Attach upper retaining strap to mounting point

Entertainment

Upper ISOFIX retaining strap

Child safety

otherwise the protective effect of the child restraint system is not given.<

the interior boot lid to ensure proper fixing of the child restraint system.<

Routing of the strap on the centre seating position

1

Forward driving direction

2

Head rest

3

Load area floor

1

Forward driving direction

4

Attaching clip

2

Head rest

5

Child restraint anchor fitting

3

Load area floor

6

Seat back

4

Attaching clip

7

Strap of the child restraint system

5

Child restraint anchor fitting

6

Seat back

7

Strap of the child restraint system

Attaching the strap of the child restraint system 1. Lift the head rest. 2. the strap of the child restraint system between the head rest and the seat back and also between the two s of the head rest. 3. Hook in the attaching clip of the strap into the corresponding anchor fitting. 4. Readjust the head rest into the lowest possible position. 5. Tighten the strap of the child restraint system.

Please make sure that the upper strap is routed between the rear seat back and

Attaching the strap of the child restraint system 1. Place the strap of the child restraint system in the centre, above the head rest. 2. Hook in the attaching clip of the strap into the corresponding anchor fitting. 3. Pull the strap of the child restraint system taut until it presses into the head rest's cushioning so that it is prevented from slipping off.

Please make sure that the upper strap is routed between the rear seat back and


Overview

the interieur boot lid to ensure proper fixing of the child restraint system.<

Locking doors and windows

Driving hints

Controls

Rear doors

Push down the locking levers on the rear doors.

Navigation

The respective door can now only be opened from the outside.

Safety switch for the rear of the vehicle Press the button on the driver door if children are travelling in the back.


Reference

Mobility

Communication

Entertainment

The rear electric windows are locked and cannot be operated from the rear of the vehicle, safety switch, see page 35.

Driving

Driving Ignition lock Inserting the remote control in the ignition lock

Automatic gearbox You cannot take out the remote control unless the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.

Start/stop button

Insert the remote control fully into the ignition lock. > Radio ready state is switched on. Individual electrical consumers can operate. > The electric steering wheel lock disengages audibly. Insert the remote control into the ignition lock before you move the vehicle, otherwise the electric steering wheel lock will not disengage and you will not be able to steer the vehicle.<

Convenient access* With convenient access, only insert the remote control in the ignition lock in exceptional cases, see page 33.

Removing the remote control from the ignition lock Do not use force to remove the remote control from the ignition lock, as otherwise damage can occur.< Before removing the remote control, first push it in as far as it will go to release the locking mechanism. > The ignition is switched off if it was on beforehand. > The electric steering wheel lock engages audibly.

The ignition is switched on and off and the engine is switched on by pressing the Start/ stop button. The engine starts if you complete the following steps while pressing the Start/stop button > Manual gearbox: depress the clutch > Automatic gearbox: depress the brake

Radio ready state Individual electrical consumers can operate. The time and the outside temperature are displayed in the instrument cluster. Radio ready state is switched off automatically: > When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock > When you touch the above the door lock, if the vehicle is fitted with convenient access*, see Locking on page 33

Ignition on All electrical consumers are ready for operation. The odometer and trip distance recorder are displayed in the instrument cluster. When the engine is switched off, please switch off the ignition and all electrical


Starting the engine

Overview

consumers you are not using, in order to preserve the battery.<

Radio ready state and ignition off

Controls

All indicator lights, warning lights and displays in the instrument cluster go out.

Starting the engine

Avoid starting, stopping and restarting the engine in rapid succession as well as repeated attempts to start the engine if it does not fire. Otherwise unburned or only partially combusted fuel could reach the catalytic converter, which could overheat and be damaged as a result.< Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle at a standstill; it is preferable to set off, driving at moderate engine speeds.

1. Depress the brake. 2. Depress the clutch and shift to idle position. 3. Press the start/stop button. Starting proceeds automatically for a certain time, and ceases automatically as soon as the engine has started.

Automatic gearbox Remote control in the ignition lock or, with convenient access, in the vehicle, see page 33. 1. Depress the brake. 2. Move the selector lever to position P. 3. Press the start/stop button. Starting proceeds automatically for a certain time, and ceases automatically as soon as the engine has started.

Diesel engine When the engine is cold and the temperature is below approx. 06/327, starting may be delayed by automatic preheating.

Driving hints

Remote control in the ignition lock or, with convenient access, in the vehicle, see page 33.

Navigation

Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running, as this constitutes a hazard. Engage neutral or selector lever position P and apply the handbrake firmly before leaving the vehicle with the engine running to prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally.<

Manual gearbox

Entertainment

Never run the engine in enclosed spaces, as inhaling the harmful exhaust gas can lead to loss of consciousness with fatal consequences. The exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, which is colourless and odourless, but highly toxic.<

Communication

General

General Take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, operate the electric windows for example and possibly injure themselves.< 51 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Reference

Stopping the engine

Mobility

A message is displayed.

Driving

When parking on an incline, fully apply the handbrake, otherwise the vehicle could begin to roll.<

With the vehicle stationary, the engine is switched off and the indicator light lights up.

Stopping the engine

The air flow rate of the air conditioner/automatic air-conditioning system is reduced.

Manual gearbox

Engine is not switched off

1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the start/stop button.

Before the engine is switched off, the system checks whether certain conditions related to safety and comfort have been met.

2. Engage first gear or reverse. 3. Fully apply the handbrake. 4. Remove the remote control from the ignition lock, see page 50.

Automatic gearbox 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, move the selector lever to position P.

In the following situations, the engine is not switched off: > Outside temperature below approx. +36/ 377 > enger compartment being heated or cooled

3. Fully apply the handbrake.

> With the automatic air-conditioning system switched on, if the windscreen is fogged over

4. Remove the remote control from the ignition lock, see page 50.

> Outside temperature high and air conditioner running

2. Press the start/stop button.

> Engine not yet at operating temperature

Automatic start/stop function*

> Battery severely depleted, see Vehicle battery on page 214 > After reversing > Driver's seat belt not fastened

The principle The automatic start/stop function helps you to save fuel and reduce emissions. To do so, the system automatically switches the engine off while the vehicle is stationary, e.g. in a traffic jam or at traffic lights; the ignition remains switched on. As soon as you depress the clutch, the engine starts automatically.

> HDC is enabled

Starting the engine With the gearshift lever in the idle position, depress the clutch. The engine is started and the indicator light goes out.

Automatic operation

Engine starts automatically

After every engine start, the automatic start/ stop function is on standby. It is activated as soon as you drive forwards at faster than 5 km/h, approx. 3 mph.

The shut-down engine starts automatically, e.g. in the following situations:

Stopping the engine When rolling to a halt, e.g. at a traffic light, or when the vehicle is stationary, shift to neutral and release the clutch.

> enger compartment heating up strongly and air conditioner switched on > With the automatic air-conditioning system switched on, if the windows and windscreen begin to fog over > Severely depleted battery, see Vehicle battery on page 214


Applying

The engine is not started automatically if the driver's seat belt or the engine compartment lid was opened after the engine had been shut down automatically. The indicator light lights up. The engine can only be started using the start/stop button.

The lever engages by itself. Controls

Safety function

With the system deactivated, the engine can only be stopped and started using the start/stop button.

Activating manually Press the button again. The orange LED goes out.

Malfunction

In exceptional cases, if the handbrake has to be used to slow or stop the vehicle, do not pull the lever up too hard. Keep the knob on the lever held in all the time. Otherwise, violent application of the handbrake could lock the rear wheels and cause the rear of the vehicle to skid.< To prevent corrosion or an imbalance between the brakes on the right and left side, apply the handbrake lightly from time to time when coasting to a standstill, provided that it is safe to do so. The brake lights do not come on when the handbrake is applied.<

Mobility

The automatic start/stop function no longer switches the engine off automatically. The indicator light lights up. You can continue your journey. Have the system checked.<

Entertainment

Raise slightly, press the knob and move the lever down.

Navigation

Driving hints

Releasing

Deactivating manually

Press the button. The orange LED lights up.

Overview

The indicator light is lit, and when you drive off an acoustic signal sounds in addition. The handbrake is still applied.

Communication

> Vehicle moving off

Indicator light

Handbrake The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent a stationary vehicle from rolling away; it acts on the rear wheels.


Reference

> Low brake partial vacuum, e.g. due to the brake pedal being depressed several times in succession

Driving

Manual gearbox

When shifting in the 5th/6th-gear plane, press the shift lever to the right. Otherwise the engine could be damaged if you inadvertently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<

Reverse Engage this only while the vehicle is standing still. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance has to be overcome.

Automatic gearbox with Steptronic*

Displays in the instrument cluster

The selector lever position is displayed, and the current gear in manual mode, e.g. M4.

Changing selector lever positions > With the ignition switched on or the engine running, the selector lever can be moved out of position P. > Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake, otherwise the selector lever will refuse to move: shiftlock. Apply the brake until you are ready to move off; this will prevent the vehicle from creeping when a gear is selected.<

In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can perform manual gearshifts with the Steptronic, see page 55.

Stopping the vehicle Before leaving the vehicle with the engine running, move the selector lever to position P and apply the handbrake to prevent the vehicle from moving.<

Taking out the remote control In order to remove the remote control from the ignition lock, you must first move the selector lever to position P and switch off the engine: interlock. Remove the remote control from the ignition lock, see page 50.

Selector lever positions P R N D M/S + –

A lock prevents inadvertent shifts to the R and P positions. To disengage the lock press the button on the front of the selector lever, see arrow.

P Park Engage this only while the vehicle is standing still. The rear wheels are locked.

R Reverse Engage this only while the vehicle is standing still.


Sport program and M/S manual-shift mode Activating the sport programme

Shifting gears using the shift paddles* on the steering wheel The shift paddles make it possible to change gears quickly as both hands can remain on the steering wheel. > When you shift gears in automatic mode via the shift paddles on the steering wheel, the gearbox switches to manual mode. > If you do not use the shift paddles to change gears and do not accelerate for a certain amount of time, the gearbox switches back to automatic mode.

Push the selector lever to the left from position D. DS is displayed in the instrument cluster. This position is recommended for a performance-oriented driving style. To deactivate the Sport program or the M/S manual mode, move the selector lever to the right into position D.

> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift paddle +.

Activating manual mode M/S

> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift paddle -.

Push the selector lever to the left from position D. Push the selector lever to the front and back. Manual mode is activated and the gear is changed. The current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, e.g. M1.

Overview Entertainment

If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane, manual mode remains active.<

Controls

Maximum performance is achieved by the kickdown. Depress the accelerator beyond the resistance at the point of full throttle.

Driving hints

Kick-down

Navigation

Use this position for all normal driving. All forward gears are selected automatically.

Upshifts and downshifts are performed only at suitable engine and road speeds; for example, the gearbox will not shift down if the resulting engine speed would be too high. The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the gear actually in use.

> To shift down: push the selector lever to the front. 55 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Communication

D Drive, automatic position

Upshifts and downshifts are performed only at suitable engine and road speeds; for example, the gearbox will not shift down if the resulting engine speed would be too high. The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the gear actually in use.

Mobility

E.g. select in the car wash. The vehicle will be able to roll.

> To shift up: push the selector lever to the back.

Reference

N Neutral

Driving

Overriding selector lever lock

Indicating a turn briefly

Should the selector lever be stuck in position P despite the ignition being switched on, the brake being depressed and the button on the selector lever being pressed, the selector lever lock can be overridden:

Push the lever as far as the pressure point and hold it there for as long as you wish to indicate a turn.

1. Unclip the gaiter of the selector lever.

Press the lever as far as the pressure point.

2. Pull the gaiter up over the selector lever until the gaiter is inside out.

The turn indicators flash three times.

Triple turn signal

This function may be activated or deactivated: 1. "Settings" 2. "Lights" 3. "Triple turn signal"

3. Using the screwdriver from the toolkit, see page 207, push the red lever while moving the selector lever to the desired position at the same time.

Turn indicator, high-beam headlights, headlight flasher

The triple turn signal is activated and stored for the remote control currently being used.

High-beam headlights/headlight flasher

Flashing turn indicators

> High-beam headlight, arrow 1 Push the lever past the pressure point. To cancel the flashing turn indicators, press the lever as far as the pressure point. Unusually fast flashing of the turn indicator light signals a failure of the indicator light. When towing, the light may also indicate a failure of the turn indicator light of the trailer.

> Headlight flasher, arrow 2

Wiper system Do not switch the wipers on if they are frozen to the windscreen, otherwise the wiper blades and the wiper motor could be damaged.<


4

Cleaning windscreen and headlights*

5

Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Switching on wipers

Press the button, arrow 3. LED in the button lights up.

Push the lever upwards, arrow 1. The lever returns to the home position when released.

Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensor Turn knurled wheel 5 upwards or downwards.

Normal wiper speed Push upwards once. The wipers switch to intermittent wipe as the vehicle comes to a halt.

Fast wiper speed Push upwards twice or once beyond the pressure point. The wipers switch to normal speed as the vehicle comes to a halt.

Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor Press button again, arrow 3. LED goes off. Deactivate the rain sensor in an automatic car wash, to prevent the vehicle's wipers from being activated inadvertently and damaged.<

Cleaning windscreen and headlights*

Switching off the wipers and flick wipe

Pull the lever, arrow 4.

Push the wiper lever downwards, arrow 2.

Fluid from the washer fluid reservoir is sprayed on to the windscreen and the wipers are operated briefly.

The lever returns to the home position when released. > Flick wipe: push down once. > Switching off from normal: push down once. > Switching off from fast: push down twice.

Intermittent wipe or rain sensor* If the vehicle is not fitted with a rain sensor, the intermittent wipe time is a preset.

When the vehicle's lights are switched on, the headlights are cleaned simultaneously at practical intervals. Only operate the washer systems and cleaning equipment if you are certain that the fluid will not freeze to the windscreen and interfere with the view ahead. Anti-freeze should therefore be added to the fluid, see 57


Navigation

Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor*

Entertainment

Switching off wipers, or selecting flick wipe

3

Communication

2

Mobility

Switching on wipers

Reference

1

Driving hints

Activating intermittent wipe or rain sensor

Overview

The rain sensor is located on the windscreen, directly in front of the inside mirror.

Controls

If the vehicle is fitted with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall.

Driving

Washer fluid. Do not run the washer systems if the washer fluid reservoir is empty, or the washer pump will be damaged.<

Windscreen washer jets The windscreen washer jets are heated automatically while the engine is running or the ignition switched on*.

The rear window wiper does not move if the lever is in position 1 before the ignition is switched on. To switch on the rear window wiper: 1. Move the lever to its home position. 2. Select the desired position again. Do not run the washer systems if the reservoir for washer fluid is empty, or the washer pump will be damaged.<

Folding the wipers upwards Important, for example when replacing the wiper blades or folding when there is frost.

Washer fluid

1. Switch off ignition.

General

2. If there is the risk of frost, make sure that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen. 3. Push the wiper lever upwards beyond the pressure point and hold for approx. 3 seconds until the wipers are secured in an almost vertical position.

Anti-freeze for the washer fluid is highly flammable. For this reason, keep away from ignition sources. Only keep in the closed original container and store out of reach of children. Please observe the information on the container.<

After folding the wiper blades down the wiper system must be reactivated, see page 56.

Washer fluid reservoir

Fold the wipers down onto the windscreen before turning on the ignition, otherwise damage could occur upon activation of the wipers.< 1. Switch on ignition. 2. Push the wiper lever downwards. Wipers move to the deactivated position and are ready for operation.

Only fill wiper fluid when the engine is turned off and subsequently close the lid completely to avoid the wiper fluid coming into with hot engine parts. Otherwise, if the fluid is spilled, there is a risk of fire and personal safety is at risk.<

Rear window wiper

All washer jets are served by a single reservoir. When filling with water, to which anti-freeze has been added if required, always follow the manufacturer's instructions. 1

Intermittent wipe. When reverse gear is engaged, continuous operation is activated.

2

Cleaning the rear window

Mix the wiper fluid before filling to adhere to the mixing ratio.


The system also breaks on downhill gradients if the engine brake is not sufficient. Do not use the system if adverse conditions do not allow driving at a constant speed, such as: > On winding roads > In increased traffic > In the event of icy roads, fog, snow, rain or loose ground Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.<

Manual gearbox You can shift gears while cruise control is activated. When you drive for an extended period at very low engine speeds, the system is deactivated.

One lever for all functions

Increasing desired speed Press the lever repeatedly to the pressure point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is set. > Each time the lever is pressed to the pressure point, the desired speed is increased by approx. 1 km/h or 1 mph. > Each time the lever is pressed beyond the pressure point, the desired speed is increased to the next multiple of 10 km/h or 5 mph on the speedometer display. The system memorises and maintains the speed.

Accelerating using the lever Accelerating slightly: Press the lever to the pressure point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached. Accelerating significantly: Press the lever beyond the pressure point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached. The vehicle accelerates without the accelerator pedal being pressed. The system memorises and maintains the speed.

Reducing speed 1

Memorising and maintaining speed or accelerating

2

Memorising and maintaining speed or decelerating

3

Deactivating cruise control

Pull the lever repeatedly, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed. Functions analogous to increasing desired speed, except that the speed is reduced.


Overview Controls

The speed that was specified with the lever on the steering column is maintained.

On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if current engine power output is insufficient. On downhill gradients, the system will brake the vehicle slightly if engine braking alone is insufficient.

Driving hints

The system is functional as from a speed of approx. 30 km/h or 20 mph.

Navigation

The principle

Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull briefly, arrow 2. The vehicle's current speed is memorised and maintained. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster.

Entertainment

Cruise control*

Maintaining current speed

Communication

Approx. 6 litres or 1.3 Imp. gal.

Recalling a speed memorised beforehand

Mobility

4

Reference

Capacity

Driving

Deactivating cruise control

Displays in the instrument cluster

Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3. The displays in the speedometer disappear. The system is also automatically turned off if: > You apply the brake > You shift gears very slowly in an automatic gearbox or shift into neutral > You select selector lever position N in an automatic gearbox > You activate DTC or deactivate DSC

1

Memorised speed

> DSC or ABS is intervening

2

Selected speed is displayed briefly

Cruise control is not deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator pedal is released, the memorised speed is again achieved and maintained.

If the display --- km/h or --- mph is shown briefly, it is possible that not all conditions required for operation are fulfilled at the moment. Calling up Check Control messages, see page 70.

Warning light The warning light lights up when cruise control has been deactivated, e.g. as a result of DSC intervening. A message appears on the Control Display.

Recalling a speed memorised beforehand

Malfunction The warning light comes on when the system has failed. A message appears on the Control Display. You can find more information as from page 69.

Press the button, arrow 4. The speed last memorised is recalled and maintained. The memorised speed value is deleted and can no longer be called up in the following instances: > When driving stability control systems are intervening > Manual gearbox: when you shift gears very slowly or shift to idle position > Automatic gearbox: when you move the selector lever to position N > When the ignition is switched off


Resetting trip distance recorder: With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

Vehicle parked

Outside temperature display and clock

3

Distance recorder – odometer – and trip distance recorder

Knob in the instrument cluster Press the button.

Revolution counter

> If the ignition is turned off, the time, outside temperature and distance recorder are displayed.

Units of measure To select the respective units of measure, km or miles for the odometer as well as 6 or 7 for the outside temperature, see page 65. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Time, outside temperature display Setting the clock, see page 68.

Outside temperature warning Once the temperature reading falls to +36/ 377, a signal sounds and a warning light comes on. There is an increased risk of icy roads. There is also an increased risk of icy roads in temperatures over +36/377. You


> The trip distance recorder is reset if the ignition is on.

Never force the engine speed up into the red warning field, see arrow. In this zone the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine. Revolution counter with warning field*: warning field and red warning field change depending on the engine temperature. The permissible engine speed increases with increasing engine temperature.

Coolant temperature Should the coolant and therefore the engine become too hot, a warning light will come on. In


Communication

Knob in the instrument cluster

2

Mobility

1

If you still want to view the time, outside temperature and odometer reading briefly after the remote control has been taken out of the ignition lock: Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

Controls

Distance recorder – odometer – and trip distance recorder

Driving hints

should therefore drive carefully over bridges and shaded roads, for example; otherwise there is an increased risk of accidents.<

Reference

Distance recorder, outside temperature display, clock

Navigation

Everything under control


addition, a message will appear on the Control Display.

Fuel gauge

Checking coolant level, see page 201.

Current fuel consumption*

Fuel tank capacity: > Petrol engine: approx. 63 litres, approx. 13.9 Imp. gal.

Shows the momentary fuel consumption. You can check how efficient and environmentallyfriendly your driving is.

> Diesel engine: approx. 61 litres, approx. 13.4 Imp. gal. Vehicle inclination can cause fluctuations in the display. Information on refuelling, see page 190.

Engine oil temperature*

Range After reaching the reserve amount: > A message is displayed briefly. > The remaining range is displayed on the onboard computer. With a remaining range of under approx. 50 km or 30 miles the message is continuously displayed.

> Cold engine: the indicator is in the low temperature range. Drive with moderate engine speed and speed.

If the remaining operating range is below 50 km, approx. 30 miles, it is imperative to add fuel, otherwise the engine's functions are not assured and damage may occur.<

> Normal operating temperature: the indicator is between approx. 1006 and approx. 1206, approx. 2127 and approx. 2487. > Hot engine: the indicator is in the high temperature range. Switch the engine off immediately and let it cool down. If the engine oil temperature is too high, a message appears on the Control Display. Check engine oil level, see page 198.


To reset the average speed: press the button in the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Average fuel consumption Is calculated for the time when the engine is running. Press the BC button on the turn indicator lever. Information is displayed on the instrument cluster.

Overview of the information By pressing the button on the turn indicator lever the information is displayed in the instrument cluster in the following sequence: > Range > Average speed > Average fuel consumption > Current fuel consumption* > No information To set the corresponding units of measure, see Units of measure on page 65.

Information in detail

You can have the average consumption for another trip displayed, see 'Displays on the Control Display' below. To reset the average consumption: press the button in the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Current fuel consumption* Shows the momentary fuel consumption. You can check how efficient and environmentallyfriendly your driving is.

Displays on the Control Display Displaying the on-board computer or journey computer on the Control Display. 1. "Vehicle information" 2. "On-board computer" or "Journey computer"

Range This display indicates how far the vehicle can probably be driven on the fuel remaining in the tank.

Overview Controls

With the journey computer, see page 64, you can have the average speed for another trip displayed.

Driving hints

The calculation does not consider the vehicle being at a standstill with the engine turned off.

Navigation

Call up information in the instrument cluster

Entertainment

Average speed

Communication

Computer

If the remaining operating range is below 50 km, approx. 30 miles, it is imperative to add fuel, otherwise the engine's functions are not assured and damage may occur.<


Reference

Mobility

It is calculated on the basis of the driving style over the last 30 km or 20 miles and the current driving style.


Displays in the "On-board computer":

1. "Vehicle information" 2. "Journey computer" 3. "Reset"

Gearshift point display* The principle

> Range > Distance to destination > Estimated arrival time, if: > A distance has been entered manually in the on-board computer, see below.

This system recommends the most fuel-efficient gear for the current driving situation. If it recommends a different, more fuel-efficient gear, this is indicated by a display to shift up or down.

Enabling/disabling the system

> A destination has been entered in the navigation system*, see page 119. Displays in the "Journey computer":

If no information is displayed on the on-board computer, see page 63, press the BC button on the turn indicator lever for approx. 3 seconds. > Departure time

Displays

> Trip duration > Distance to be driven For both displays: > The average speed and > Average fuel consumption are displayed.

Resetting fuel consumption and speed Resetting the values for average speed and average fuel consumption: 1. Select the respective menu item and press the controller. 2. Press the controller again to confirm.

Resetting the Journey computer Resetting all values:

1

Most fuel-efficient gear

2

Drive more fuel-efficiently, shift up into the displayed gear

3

Drive more fuel-efficiently, shift down into the displayed gear

As usual, you can call up the information of the on-board computer.


Some settings and information can only be changed or displayed when the ignition is turned on. Some settings cannot be changed while the vehicle is in motion.

Date setting 69

Viewing Next Service indicator 66

Button for: > Setting values Button for: > Confirming selected display or set values > Calling up computer information 63

Units of measure

Function

When the lights are switched on: instrument lighting brightness 90

Setting the units of measure Dimensions for consumption, trip/distance, temperature and pressure may be changed. 1. "Settings"

Calling up Check Control 69

Communication

Symbol

The outside temperature reading and the time reappear when you press button 2 or if you make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If required, complete the current setting first.

2. "Language/Units"

Checking engine oil level* 198

3. Select the desired menu item. 4. Select the desired unit. The settings are saved for the remote control currently in use. 65 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Mobility

2

Exiting displays Navigation

> Selecting display

Reference

1

Overview

Operating principle

Controls

Function

Setting the clock 68

Driving hints

Symbol

Entertainment

Settings and information


Next Service indicator

Displays Symbol

Function

Next Service indicator

Engine oil

The remaining distance and the date of the next routine maintenance work appointment are displayed immediately after the engine is started or the engine is switched on.

Roadworthiness test*

The service agent can read out current service requirements from the remote control. In certain cases and for certain maintenance work, the remaining distance or due date can be displayed directly on the instrument cluster.

Front brake pads

Rear brake pads

Brake fluid 1. Switch on the ignition, see page 50. 2. Tap button 1 on the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "SERVICE-INFO". 3. Press button 2. 4. Use button 1 to step through the individual service items.

The sequence of displayed services may vary. The data for the next routine maintenance work is displayed first.

Detailed information on the service requirements More information on the maintenance scope can be displayed on the Control Display.


3. "Service required"

Overview

1. "Vehicle information"

Controls

2. "Vehicle status"

4. "§ vehicle inspection" Driving hints

3. "Service required" Essential maintenance routines and any statutory inspections required are displayed. More information can be displayed on every entry: Select the entry and press the controller.

No servicing is currently needed.

6. "Date:" 7. Make the settings.

Routine maintenance work or a legally required inspection is due soon. Please make a service appointment. Service appointment overdue.

Entering appointments* Entering appointments for legally required inspections. Ensure that the date on the Control Display is set correctly, see page 69. 1. "Vehicle information"

9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment. 10. Press the controller to adopt the setting. The date input is memorised. To exit the menu: Jog the controller to the left.

Automatic Service notification* Data on the maintenance condition or legally required inspections of the vehicle are automatically transmitted to the Service before they are due.

Mobility

You can check when Service was notified.


Reference

2. "Vehicle status"

8. Press the controller to adopt the setting. The year is selected.

Communication

5. Call up date input.

Symbols

Entertainment

Navigation

To exit the menu: Jog the controller to the left.


1. "Vehicle information" 2. "Vehicle status"

7. Press button 2. The system accepts the new time.

Via iDrive 1. Press the MENU button. The main menu is displayed.

3. "Options" 4. "Last Teleservice Call" 2. "Settings"

Clock The settings are saved for the remote control currently in use, see also Personal Profile on page 26.

Setting the clock In the instrument cluster To set the 12h/24h format, see Setting the time format below.

Setting the clock 1. "Settings" 2. "Clock/Date"

1. Tap button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the time and the word "SET". 2. Press button 2. 3. Use button 1 to set the hours. 4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

3. "Time:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed and press the controller.

5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.

5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes are displayed and press the controller.

6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

The time is stored.


1. "Settings"

4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed and press the controller. 5. Make the setting for month and year accordingly.

3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format and press the controller. The time format is memorised.

The date is memorised.

Setting the date format Controls

2. "Clock/Date"

1. "Settings" 2. "Clock/Date"

Date

Overview

Setting the time format

3. "Format:"

Driving hints

The settings are saved for the remote control currently in use, see also Personal Profile on page 26.

Date setting

The date format is memorised.

Check Control The principle

1. Tap button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the date and the word "SET". 2. Press button 2. 3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.

Check Control monitors vehicle functions and informs you of a fault in the monitored systems. A Check Control message includes indicator or warning lights in the instrument cluster, if applicable, an acoustic signal and text messages at the top of the Control Display.

Indicator and warning lights

4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

Entertainment

4. Select the desired format.

Communication

To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, see Setting the date format below.

Navigation

In the instrument cluster

5. Set the month and the year in the same way.

Via iDrive 1. "Settings" 2. "Clock/Date" 3. "Date:"

Indicator and warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colours. 69 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

6. Press button 2. The system accepts the new date.


Some lights are checked for proper functioning and thus come on briefly when the engine starts or the ignition is switched on.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the BC button on the turn indicator lever. indicates that Check Control messages have been stored. You can have the Check Control messages shown later on.

Text messages Text messages on the top part of the Control Displays in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lights.

Additional text messages More information on the majority of Check Control messages can subsequently be displayed, e.g. the cause for a fault or the corresponding action to be taken. For this reason, see the following.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding light comes on. Exit the displayed information: Jog the controller to the left.

Some Check Control messages remain in the display until the faults have been rectified. These messages cannot be hidden. If several faults occur, the messages are displayed in sequence. Depending on your vehicle's equipment, they may be marked with the symbol shown here. Other Check Control messages are automatically hidden after approx. 20 seconds. However, they are saved and can be displayed again. Depending on your vehicle's equipment, they may be marked with the symbol shown here.

Displaying Check Control messages stored in memory

1. Tap button 1 on the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "CHECK CONTROL". 2. Press button 2. "CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check Control messages. If a Check Control message has been


Overview

3. "Warning at:"

3. Press button 1 to check for other messages.

Displaying Check Control messages stored in memory

Controls

4. Press button 2. The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.


4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed.

2. "Vehicle status"


3. "Check Control"

The speed limit is memorised.

Adopting actual speed as the limit

Driving hints

stored, the corresponding light is shown. It is accompanied by a text message on the Control Display.

1. "Settings" Navigation

2. "Speed" 3. "Select current speed"

Speed limit Enter a speed limit at which a Check Control message will warn you. Repeat warning if the set speed limit was undershot once by at least 5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the speed limit

4. Press controller. The actual speed is adopted as the limit value.

Activating/deactivating the speed limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed"

2. "Speed"

3. "Warning"


Reference

Mobility

1. "Settings"

Communication

Entertainment

4. Select a text message.


4. Press controller. Limit warning is switched on.

Settings on the Control Display Language

Brightness Adjusting brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to ambient light conditions. However, the basic setting can be changed. 1. "Settings" 2. "Control display"

Setting the language

3. "Brightness"

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Language:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired setting is obtained. 5. Press controller. 4. Select the desired language. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the speech dialogue

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. The brightness adjustment may not be immediately recognisable, depending on the conditions of light.

Toggle between a standard and short dialogue. 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Speech mode:" 4. Select the desired dialogue.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. 72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Higher, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detectable.

> Visual display

False warnings

Measurement

Under the following conditions, PDC may display warnings although there is not obstruction in the sensor area:

Ultra sonic sensors in the bumpers measure the distance. The range is approx. 2 m, approx. 2.2 yards Acoustic warning will only sound when:

> In heavy rain > Due to heavy soiling or icing-up of the sensors

> The front and both rear sensors detect a distance of approx. 60 cm or 23.6 in.

> Due to snow-covered sensors

> The rear centre sensor detects a distance of approx. 1.50 m or 60 in.

> In large right-angled buildings with smooth walls, e.g. underground car parks

Limits of the system PDC is no substitute for your personal assessment of the traffic situation. Please observe the traffic situation around the vehicle additionally by looking. Otherwise there is a risk of accident from persons or objects that are out of the reach of the PDC sensors. Loud sound sources outside or inside the vehicle can drown out the PDC signal.< Avoid approaching an object at speed. Avoid driving off at speed while the PDC is still active. Otherwise the system could warn you too late due to physical data.<

> Due to uneven road surfaces

> Due to other ultra sonic sources, e.g. road sweepers, steam jet cleaners or fluorescent tubes

Towing a trailer Rear sensors cannot measure properly. They therefore do not come on. A message appears on the Control Display.

Driving hints

Low objects already indicated, such as kerbs, may enter the sensors' dead areas before or after a continuous audible signal is given.

Navigation

> Audible warning signals

> Objects with corners and sharp edges

Entertainment

PDC assists you when parking. If you slowly approach an object in front of or behind your vehicle, this is signalled by:

> Low objects

Automatic activation Insert reverse gear or selector lever position R when the engine is running or the ignition is turned on.

Switching off automatically

Limits of ultra sonic measurement

System switches off and LED goes off:

Detection of objects can reach the limits of physical ultra sonic measurement, such as:

> When driving headways for approx. 50 m or approx. 55 yards 73


Mobility

The rear-view camera* may be activated in addition to Park Distance Control PDC, see page 75.

Communication

> Thin or v-shaped objects

The principle

Controls

> Trailer towbars and couplings

Reference

Park Distance Control PDC*

Overview

Technical features for driving comfort and safety


> When driving headways over approx. 30 km/h or 20 mph

Volume control

If required, switch the system on again.

You can adjust the volume of the PDC warning sound, see page 139.

Manually switching it on/off

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Visual warning The fact that the vehicle is approaching an object is shown on the Control Display. Objects that are further away from the vehicle will appear on the Control Display before an audible warning signal is given.

Press the button. > On: LED light up > Off: LED goes off

Audible warning signals An intermittent tone indicates the position of an object as the vehicle approaches it. If an object is detected on the left behind the vehicle, the acoustic warning signal is emitted from left rear left loudspeaker. The nearer an object is, the shorter the intervals are. When the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 30 cm, approx. 12 in, the signal becomes continuous. An alternating continuous signal is emitted if there are objects in front of and behind the vehicle. An interval sound is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds: > If you stop in front of an object that is only detected by the sensors on the edges

The display is appears as soon as PDC is activated. If you last selected rear-view camera vision, it will be displayed once again. Switching over to PDC: 1. Select the "Switch off rear view camera" symbol on the Control Display. 2. Press controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Display in the Control Display Switching on the rear-view camera using iDrive With activated PDC:

> If you are driving along a wall

1. Select the

The acoustic signal is switched off:


> If the vehicle moves more than approx. 10 cm or 3.9 in away from an object

The image of the rear-view camera is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

> If the reverse gear or selector lever position P is engaged.

"Rear view camera" symbol.


The image of the rear-view camera appears if the system was activated using iDrive.

Switching off automatically

Overview

Malfunction

A check control message is displayed, see page 69.

If the system was activated manually, see below, it is switched off and the LED goes off if:

The areas in front of and behind the vehicle are displayed in a hatched fashion. PDC has failed. Have the system checked.

> When driving headways for approx. 50 m or approx. 55 yards

To ensure full functionality:

> You drive headways over 30 km/h or 19 mph

> Keep sensors clean and free from ice.

If required, switch the system on again.

Manually switching it on/off

The principle

Limits of the system Monitor the traffic situation around the vehicle additionally by directly looking around. Otherwise there is an increased risk of accident for persons or objects that are outside of the camera range.< The rear-view camera cannot detect higher, protruding objects, e.g. wall projections.<

Automatic activation

Press the button. > On: LED lights up. > Off: LED goes off. If PDC appears, switch on the rear-view camera using iDrive, see page 74.

Assistance function Operating requirements > Rear-view camera is activated. > Tailgate is completely closed.

Insert the reverse gear or selector lever position R while the engine is running or the ignition is on. 75 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Mobility

The rear-view camera assists during parking backwards and manoeuvring. For this purpose, the area behind your vehicle appears in the Control Display.

Communication

Entertainment

Rear-view camera*

Reference

> When using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the sensors for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 30 cm, approx. 12 in.

Driving hints

> You drive headways with approx. 15 km/h or approx. 9 mph

Navigation

> You drive headways for approx. 10 m or approx. 11 yards

Controls

If the system was automatically activated it is switched off and the LED goes off if:


Track lines

Parking with track and turning circle lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning circle lines lead into the edges of the parking spot.

> Can be included in the image of the rearview camera in gearbox position R. > They help to evaluate required space for parking and manoeuvring on even road surfaces. > They depend on the current steering angle and are continuously adapted to the steering wheel movements.

2. Turn the steering wheel so that the track lines cover the respective turning circle lines.

Insert parking assistance lines using iDrive, see page 77.

Turning circle lines

Zoom on trailer tow hitch* The area around the trailer tow hitch can be displayed larger to facilitate the attachment of a trailer. > Can be inserted in the image of the rearview camera. > Display the smallest possible turning circle on an even road surface. > If the steering is angled only one turning circle line is displayed. Insert parking assistance lines using iDrive, see page 77. The distance of the trailer to the coupling can be estimated with two static semicircles. A docking line which depends on the steering angle helps you to aim at the trailer with the trailer tow hitch. 76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

The zoom on the trailer tow hitch is displayed.

Insert the trailer tow hitch using iDrive, see page 77.

Display on the Control Display

Marking an obstruction

Activating the rear-view camera using iDrive

Overview

The zoom function can be displayed with the activated rear-view camera.

"Rear view camera" symbol.

2. Press controller. The image of the rear-view camera is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Brightness symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller.

Contrast With activated rear-view camera: 1. Select the

symbol.

Activating the assistance functions

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller.

Several assistance functions may be activated simultaneously.

Camera

The zoom function for trailer towing may only be activated individually.

"Parking help lines" symbol.

2. Press controller. Track and turning circle lines are displayed.

Inserting obstruction markings 1. Select the

"Obstacle marking" symbol.

2. Press controller. Three-dimensional markings are displayed.

The lens of the rear-view camera is located in the handle bar of the tailgate. Picture quality is influenced by soiling. Clean the lens with a moist, non-scratching cloth.

Inserting the trailer tow hitch* 1. Select the bol.

"Trailer tow bar - zoom" sym-

2. Press controller. 77 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Reference

1. Select the

Communication

Inserting parking assistance lines

Navigation

Insert the obstruction markings using iDrive, see page 77.

1. Select the

Entertainment

The colour shades correspond to those of PDC. Estimating the distance to the displayed object is facilitated.

With activated rear-view camera:

Mobility

> Three dimensional markings can be inserted into the image of the rear-view camera.

Driving hints

1. Select the

Controls

With activated PDC:


Driving stability control systems

Deactivating DSC

ABS Anti-lock Brake System ABS prevents the wheels from locking when the brakes are applied. The vehicle can still be steered during a full braking. This increases driving safety. ABS is ready to operate each time the engine is started.

Electronic brake force distribution The system regulates the braking pressure on the rear wheels in order to stabilise the braking behaviour.

Braking assistant The system enables maximum brake assistance automatically as soon as the brake is rapidly depressed. This enables the braking distance during a full braking to be as short as possible. It also makes full use of the advantages offered by ABS. Maintain pressure on the brake as long as full braking is required.

Dynamic Stability Control DSC The principle DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing traction when you pull away from rest or accelerate. Additionally, DSC detects non-stable driving conditions like a swerving tail end or a drift of the front wheels. DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a safe track within the physical boundaries by reducing engine output and by braking individual wheels. It is therefore the driver's responsibility to adopt a suitable driving style in every situation. Not even DSC can overcome the laws of physics. Do not restrict the available additional safety by driving dangerously.<

Press the button for at least 3 seconds; indicator light for DSC lights up in the instrument cluster. Both Dynamic Traction Control DTC and DSC are deactivated. The stabilising and traction-improving effects are no longer available. In the same way as with a differential interlock, brake intervention takes place on the rear axle if the drive wheels spin severely, improving forward momentum even if the DSC is disabled. Reactivate DSC a soon as possible in order to driving stability.

Activating DSC Press the button again; indicator light in the instrument cluster goes off.

As a check Indicator light flashes: DSC is regulating the propulsive and braking forces. Indicator lights light up: DSC is deactivated.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC The principle The DTC system is a variant of the DSC system but designed for drive. The system ensures maximum drive with limited driving stability in special road conditions, e.g. on snow-covered road surfaces. Consequently, you must exercise suitable caution when driving under these conditions.


HDC is an assistant for hill descents that automatically controls the speed on steep downhill gradients. The vehicle moves with a little more than double the walking speed with you having to brake. You can activate HDC below a speed of approx. 35 km/h, approx. 22 mph. When driving downhill the vehicle reduces the speed under approx. 35 km/h or 22 mph to more than double the walking speed and maintains this speed.

Press the button; indicator light for DTC lights up on the instrument cluster.

The system goes into standby for as long as you actively brake. The system does not brake.

Increasing or decreasing speed

Indicator light flashes: DTC is regulating the propulsive and braking forces. Indicator lights light up: DTC is activated.

You can vary this speed within a range of approx. 5 to 25 km/h, approx. 3 to 16 mph, by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake. You can set a target speed in the same range using the lever of the cruise control*.

Deactivating DTC Press the button again; DTC indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go off.

1

Increasing speed

2

Reducing speed Mobility

xDrive* xDrive is the all-wheel drive system in your vehicle. xDrive and DSC interact with one another to further optimise traction and dynamic driving. Depending on the driving situation and prevailing road conditions, the xDrive four-wheel-drive system distributes driving power variably to the front and rear axles.

Overview Communication

As a check

Controls

Hill Descent Control HDC*

Activating DTC

Driving hints

> Driving with snow chains.

Navigation

> Freeing a vehicle out of deep snow or on loose ground by rocking.

Performance Control improves the agility of your vehicle. To improve agility, when driving in a sporty way, the rear wheel on the inside of the curve is braked and a majority of the resulting brake force is compensated by engine intervention.

Entertainment

> Driving on slush or on snow-covered road surfaces.

Performance Control*


Reference

In the following exceptional situations it may be best to activate DTC for a short time:


Activating HDC

Drive-off assistant with 6-cylinder engines The system assists you when driving off from gradients. It is not necessary to use the handbrake for this. 1. Hold the vehicle with the brake. 2. Release the footbrake and drive off uninterruptedly.

Press the button; the LED over the button lights up. The LED flashes when the vehicle is being braked automatically.

Deactivating HDC Press the button again; the LED will go out. Above approx. 60 km/h, approx. 35 mph, HDC is deactivated automatically.

After releasing the footbrake drive off uninterruptedly, otherwise the drive off assistant will not hold the vehicle after approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin to roll backwards.<

Run Flat Indicator RPA The principle The system does not measure the tyre pressures as such.

Using HDC With manual gearbox: Use HDC in low gears and in reverse. With automatic gearbox: HDC can be used in any drive position.

Displays in the instrument cluster*

It detects a pressure loss on the basis of a comparison between the speeds at which the individual wheels rotate while the vehicle is in motion. If a tyre loses pressure, its diameter changes. This in turn alters the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel. This is detected and reported as a flat tyre.

Operating requirements

1

Display for target speed

2

HDC indicator

The system requires initialisation with the correct tyre pressure to ensure a reliable reporting of the flat tyre. The system must be reinitialised every time tyre inflation pressures are corrected, after each change of a wheel or tyre, and after a trailer has been attached or detached.

System limitations

Malfunction If the HDC indicator goes out while HDC mode is active or does not appear: HDC is temporarily unavailable due to high brake temperature, or DSC has failed.

Serious, sudden tyre damage due to external influence cannot be announced.< A natural, even loss of pressure in all four tyres is not detected. Consequently, check the tyre pressures at regular intervals.


> System was not initialised > Driving on snow-covered or slippery surfaces

4. Start the engine – do not drive off.


6. Drive off.

2. "Vehicle status"

Initialisation is completed while the vehicle is on the move, but this can be interrupted at any time. Initialisation resumes automatically as soon as the vehicle starts moving again.

Indication of a flat tyre The warning light shows red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, an acoustic signal is emitted. The status is displayed.

Initialising The adjusted tyre inflation pressure values are taken over during initialising as reference values to be able to detect a flat tyre. Initialisation is started by confirming the correct inflation pressures. Do not initialise the system when driving with snow chains*. 1. "Vehicle information" 2. "Vehicle status"

There is a flat tyre or substantial loss of tyre pressure. 1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the vehicle. Avoid violent or sudden braking and steering manoeuvres. 2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with standard tyres* or run-flat tyres*. The symbol identifying run-flat tyres, see page 195, is the circle with the letters RSC on the tyre sidewall.

What to do in the event of a flat tyre Normal tyres* 1. Identify the damaged tyre. Do this by checking the tyre pressure in all four tyres. The pressure gauge of the Mobility System, see page 212, can be used for this purpose. 81


Mobility

3. "Flat Tyre Monitor"

5. Start initialisation with "Confirm tyre pressure".

Navigation

The current status of the Run Flat Indicator can be shown on the Control Display, e.g. whether the Run Flat Indicator is active.

Entertainment

Status display

Communication

> Driving with snow chains*

Driving hints

Controls

> Sporty style of driving: high slip at the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration

Overview

3. "Confirm tyre pressure"

Reference

In the following situations, the system could be slow to respond or operate incorrectly:


If all four tyres are inflated to the correct pressures, the Run Flat Indicator might not have been initialised. In this case initialise the system. If it is not possible to identify, a Service Centre. 2. Fix the puncture with the Mobility System, see page 212.

Run flat tyres* If a tyre has punctured you can continue your journey, driving at speeds up to a maximum of 80 km/h or 50 mph. Do not continue your journey if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tyres, otherwise a serious accident could occur.< If you continue a journey with a flat tyre: 1. Avoid violent or sudden braking and steering manoeuvres. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h or 50 mph. 3. Check the pressures in all four tyres at the next opportunity. If all four tyres are inflated to the correct pressures, the Run Flat Indicator might not have been initialised. In this case initialise the system. Maximum possible distance with tyre entirely deflated: > With low loads: 1 to 2 persons without luggage: Approx. 250 km, approx. 150 miles > With moderate loads: 2 persons, luggage area full, or 4 persons without luggage: Approx. 150 km, approx. 90 miles > With a full load or while towing a trailer: 4 or more persons, luggage area full: Approx. 50 km, approx. 30 miles

Do not reinitialise the Run Flat Indicator. In this way, the existing message indicating the flat tyre continues to remind you that the tyre is damaged. This procedure can be repeated several times. Moderate your speed and do not exceed 80 km/h or 50 mph. In the event of a loss of tyre inflation pressure driving characteristics change, e.g. reduced track stability during braking, longer braking distance and different self-steering properties.< When a trailer is being towed, heavy trailers in particular can start to snake. For this reason, do not exceed 60 km/h, approx. 35 mph, as otherwise there is a danger that accidents might occur.< Vibrations or loud noise while driving may point at a definite failure of the tyre. Reduce speed and stop, otherwise parts of the tyre could come loose and cause an accident. your Service and do not continue your trip.<

Servotronic* The principle The Servotronic varies the steering force required to turn the wheels, depending on the speed at which you are driving. At low speeds, steering power is boosted strongly, i.e. less effort is required for steering. Power assistance for the steering diminishes as road speed increases.

Malfunction Malfunctions are indicated on the Check Control, see page 69.

In the case of minor damage, in particular to the tyre tread surface, the distance that can be travelled can be extended. For this purpose, after the message take the next opportunity to inflate the damaged tyre to a maximum of 3.5 bar or 50 psi. 82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

The brake lights flash in the event of heavy braking. The hazard warning flashers are activated shortly before coming to a standstill and the brake lights continue to light up, but no longer flash. Deactivate hazard warning flashers: > Depress the accelerator. > Press the hazard warning flashers button.

Overview

On the right: sharp braking.

Controls

Dynamic brake lights*

Driving hints

On the left: normal braking.

Side airbags

2

Head-level airbags

3

Side airbags

The side airbag s the head and the body in the lateral chest area in the event of lateral impact.

Front airbags Front airbags protect the driver and the front enger from a head-on impact where the protection from the seat belts alone is no longer sufficient.

Head-level airbags In the event of a lateral impact the head airbag s the head.


Mobility

Front airbags

Reference

1

Communication

Entertainment

Navigation

Airbags


Protective effect The airbags are not deployed in every crash, e.g. in the event of less severe crashes or rearend collisions. Even if all these instructions are complied with, certain injuries as a result of with the airbag cannot be entirely ruled out, depending on the circumstances in which an accident occurs. Occupants with sensitive hearing may be subject to brief and generally temporary impaired hearing caused by the ignition and inflation noise. Information for the optimum protection of the airbags > Keep your distance from the airbags. > Always grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to minimise the risk of injury to the hands or arms in the event of the airbag are deployed. > No other persons, pets or objects should be held or permitted to remain between the airbag and yourself.

> Do not dismantle the airbag occupant restraint system. > Do not remove the steering wheel. > Never attach any material to the airbag covers with adhesive, place material over them or modify them in any other way. > Do not modify the individual components of the system or its wiring in any way. This includes covers on the steering wheel, instrument , seats and roof posts, as well as the sides of the roof lining.< Avoid touching the system's components immediately after it has deployed, as there is a risk of burns. Please only commission your Service or a workshop with the required legal explosive authorisation to inspect, repair or disassemble and scrap the airbag generators. Otherwise, any careless or unskilled interference with the system could lead to its failure or to accidental deployment with the risk of injury.<

Operational readiness of the airbag system

> Do not use the front airbag cover on the front enger's side as a tray. > Keep the dashboard and windows in the area of the enger's side free, i.e. do not attach adhesive foil or covers and do not fit brackets for e.g. navigation devices or mobile phones. > Make sure that the front enger adopts a correct seated position, e.g. does not rest feet or legs on the instrument ; otherwise he/she could sustain leg injuries in the event of the deployment of the front airbag. > Do not fit seat covers, cushions or other objects not specifically approved for seats with integral side airbags to the front seats. > Do not hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets over the backrests. > Make sure that engers do not lean their head against the head or side airbags, otherwise this could cause injuries should the airbags deploy.

When the radio ready state, see page 50, or the ignition is switched on, the warning light lights up for a short time to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational.

Airbag system faulty > Warning light does not come on when the radio ready state or the ignition is switched on. > Warning light remains lit. In the event of a fault in the airbag system, have it checked without delay, as there is


Indicator light for the front enger airbags

Deactivating the front enger airbags Insert the key and press it in. Hold it in and turn to the stop into the OFF position. Pull the key out at the stop.

After switching on the ignition the light indicates if the airbags are activated or deactivated. The indicator light remains on if the front enger airbags have been deactivated. The indicator light does not come on if the front enger airbags have been activated.

Entertainment

Front and side airbags for the front enger can be deactivated and reactivated with the integrated key from the remote control.

Navigation

The indicator light for the front enger airbags indicate the functional status of the front enger airbags.

Driving hints

Controls

Keyswitch* for front enger airbags

Overview

otherwise the risk that the system will not function as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident occurs.<

Make sure that the switch is in the OFF position after pulling out the key and that the indicator light for the front enger airbags lights up, otherwise the airbags are not deactivated.<

Communication

The airbags for the front enger are deactivated when the switch is in this position. The airbags for the driver remain fully active. Once the child restraint system has been removed, immediately reactivate the airbags for the front enger so that they can deploy correctly in the event of an accident.

Activating the front enger airbags Hold it in and turn it to the stop into the ON position. Pull the key out at the stop. The front enger airbags are reactivated and can deploy correctly if the need arises. 85 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Insert the key and press it in.

Lights

Lights Overview

If required, switch on the side lights, switch position 4.

Low-beam headlights The low-beam headlight lights up if the ignition is turned on.

Welcome lights Leave the switch in position 2 or 5 when parking the vehicle: parking lights and interior lights will light up briefly when the vehicle is unlocked. 1

Headlight beam throw adjustment

2

Automatic driving lights control*, daytime driving lights*, welcome lights, High-Beam Assistant* and Adaptive Head Light*

Activating/deactivating the welcome lights

3

Lights off, daytime driving lights* for Xenon headlights*

2. "Lights"

4

Side lights

5

Low-beam headlights and welcome lights

6

Fog lights

7

Rear fog lights*

Side lights/low-beam headlights, driving lights control* Side lights The vehicle is lit up all around, e.g. for parking.

1. "Settings" 3. "Welcome light"

The welcome light is activated and stored for the remote control currently being used.

Automatic driving lights control*

Do not leave the side lights on for an extended period of time, otherwise the battery will discharge and it is possible that you are unable to start the engine.

Switch position 2: the low-beam headlights are switched on and off automatically depending on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel, twilight, and in precipitation. LED next to the symbol lights up.

It is preferable to switch on the right or left parking lights, see page 88.

The headlights may also come on when the sun is sitting low on a blue sky.

Opening the driver door when the ignition is turned off: the outside lighting is automatically switched off of the light switch is in position 2, 3 or 5.

Low-beam headlights are always on if the fog lights* are switched on. The driving lights control function cannot substitute for your personal judgement of when it is necessary to switch on the lights.


3. "Daytime driving lights"

Overview

The sensors are unable, for instance, to recognise fog or hazy weather. To avoid any safety risk in such situations, switch on the low-beam headlights manually.<

Headlight courtesy delay feature

The principle Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlight control system that makes it possible to illuminate the road surface responsively. The light cones from the headlights are directed to suit the road ahead on the basis of steering angle and other parameters.


Daytime driving lights* The daytime driving lights light up in position 2, for Xenon headlights* also in switch position 3.

Activate/deactivate 1. "Settings" 2. "Lights"

Driving hints

Adaptive Head Light*

During sharp turns at speeds up to approximately 40 km/h or 25 mph, for example in hairpin bends or when cornering, the near-side fog light is switched on to provide cornering light. This gives you more light and a better view along the inside line of the bend.

Activating Turn the light switch to position 2, see page 86 when the ignition is turned on. The cornering lights is automatically activated irrespective of the steering angle or the turn indicator. Standstill function*: to avoid dazzling the drivers of oncoming vehicles, the Adaptive Head Light feature directs light towards the front enger's side when the vehicle is at standstill. When you are driving in reverse, only the cornering light is active and lights up the outside area of the bend.


Navigation

4. Set a time of duration, or 0 s to deactivate the function.

Entertainment

3. "Home lights:"

Communication

2. "Lights"

Mobility

1. "Settings"

The daytime driving lights are activated and stored for the remote control currently being used.

Reference

Setting the duration or deactivating

Controls

If you activate the headlight flasher after switching off the ignition, with the lights switched off, the low-beam headlights come on and remain on for a certain time.

Lights

Malfunction

3

A message appears. Adaptive Head Light is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Headlight beam throw adjustment Halogen headlights Adapt the headlight beam throw of the low-beam headlights by turning the knurled wheel, otherwise you will dazzle oncoming traffic: The second value in each case applies when towing a trailer.

Parking lights*

Right or left parking lights* The vehicle can be lit up only on one side.

Switching on After parking the vehicle, push the lever up or down beyond the pressure point for approx. two seconds, arrow 3. The parking lights will discharge the battery. Therefore, you should not leave them on for longer periods of time, as otherwise the battery might not have enough power to start the engine.<

Switching off Push the lever in the opposite direction as far as the pressure point, arrow 3.

0 / 1 = 1 to 2 persons without luggage 1 / 1 = 5 persons without luggage

High-Beam Assistant*

1 / 2 = 5 persons with luggage 2 / 2 = 1 person, luggage area full

The principle

Comply with rear axle load limit, see page 225.

If the light is switched on this system automatically switches the high-beam headlights on and back off. A sensor on the front of the interior mirror controls this process. The Assistant ensures that the high-beam headlights are switched on whenever the traffic situation permits this. You can always intervene and switch the high-beam headlight on and off normally.

Xenon headlights* The headlight beam throw is regulated automatically, e.g. when accelerating and braking and to adapt to various loads being carried.

High-beam headlights/ parking lights

Activating the high-beam headlight assistant 1. Turn the light switch in position 2 , see page 86. 2. Jog the turn indicator in the high-beam direction when the low-beam headlight is switched on. The indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on. High-beam and lowbeam headlights are automatically activated.

1

High-beam headlights

2

Headlight flasher

The system reacts to lighting of oncoming traffic and vehicles ahead as well as sufficient illumination, e.g. in built-up areas.


Activating with iDrive 1. "Settings" 2. "Lights" > High-beam headlights on, arrow 1

3. "High beam assistance"

Driving hints

> High-beam headlights off/headlight flashers, arrow 2

Overview

> If the sensor is soiled. The sensor is located on the front of the interior mirror. Do not cover the area with stickers etc. Clean the sensor with a little glass cleaner and a moist cloth.

Controls

Manual high beams and low beams

Jog the turn indicator towards the high-beam headlights to reactivate the high-beam assistant.

> When trying to detect poorly-illuminated road s such as pedestrians, bicyclists, equestrians or carts, when trains or ships are close to the road, or when game are ing across the road > In sharp bends, on steep crests or hollows, at intersections or when there is halfobscured oncoming traffic on motorways > In poorly illuminated towns or wherever there are highly reflective signs

Side lights or low-beam headlights must be switched on. Press the button. The green indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up. If automatic driving lights control has been activated, see page 86, the low-beam headlights come on automatically when the front fog lights are switched on.

Rear fog lights The low-beam headlights or side lights with fog lights must be switched on.

> In low-speed areas > When the windscreen in front of the inside mirror is covered with condensation, dirt, stickers, labels, etc.

Entertainment

Fog lights

Communication

> During extremely unfavourable weather conditions such as fog or heavy precipitation

Fog lights

Press the button. The yellow indicator light in the instrument cluster lights

Mobility

The following situations are examples of when the system may not work at all or only to a limited extent, making it necessary for you to take action yourself:

High-beam assistant is activated and saved for the remote control currently in use.

up.


Reference

The High-Beam Assistant cannot substitute for your personal judgement of when to use the high-beam headlights. To avoid any safety risk, switch to the low-beam headlights manually in situations that require this.<

Navigation

System limitations

Lights

Instrument lighting You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting only when the side lights or the lowbeam headlights are switched on.

1. Press button 1 up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the brightness setting and the word "SET". 2. Press button 2.

To protect the battery, all lights inside the vehicle are switched off about 8 minutes after the ignition is switched off, see Start/stop button on page 50.<

Switching the interior light on and off manually Press the button. Switching it off permanently: press and hold button for approx. 3 seconds. Revoke this condition: jog button.

Reading lights Press the button. There are reading lights at the front and rear* next to the interior lights. 3. Press button 1 up or down to select the desired brightness. 4. Press button 2. The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.

Interior lights General Interior light, footwell light*, the door entry lighting*, luggage area light and the ground lights* are controlled automatically. The LEDs for the ground lights are set in the door handles and illuminate the ground in front of the doors.


Overview

Climate

2

Maximum cooling

3

Temperature, left

4

AUTO program

5

Air flow rate, manual, AUTO intensity

6

Display

7

Automatic Air Recirculation Control AUC/ recirculated-air mode

8

ALL programme

9

Temperature, right

see AUTO program below. All you need to do is select an inside temperature which is comfortable for you. The following sections inform you in detail about how to adjust the settings. Most settings are saved for the remote control currently in use, see also Personal Profile settings on page 27.

Adjusting air distribution manually The air distribution can be switched on and off manually. The air is directed to the windscreen, to the upper body area and to the

10 Defrosting windows 11 Switching cooling function on/off manually 12 Rear window heating

footwell.

13 Seat heating*, right 39

Automatic air distribution can be switched on again with the AUTO button. The cooling function is then automatically turned on and the manually set air distribution deleted.

14 Inside temperature sensor, do not cover 15 Seat heating*, left 39

Communication

Manual air distribution

Mobility

1

Entertainment

Navigation

Driving hints

Controls

Automatic air conditioning system*

The AUTO program 4 offers optimal air distribution and air flow rate for almost all conditions, 91 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Reference

Preferred interior climate

Climate

Temperature Adjust the desired temperature by turning. The automatic air-conditioning system attains this temperature as quickly as possible by using maximum cooling or heating power if necessary. The temperature is then maintained. Avoid switching between different temperature settings in short succession. In such a case the automatic climate control has not got enough time to maintain the set temperature. Unconstrained by the outside temperature, the highest setting produces the maximum heat output. Unconstrained by the outside temperature, the lowest setting cools constantly.

Maximum cooling Press the button. The system sets the lowest-possible temperature, maximum air flow rate and in recirculated-air mode. The air comes out of the outlets for the upper body area. For this reason, open them. The air is cooled as rapidly as possible: > Above an outside temperature of approx. 0 6/32 °F. > When the engine is running.

AUTO program Press the button. Air flow rate, air distribution and temperature are controlled automatically. The air is directed to the windscreen, the windows and to the upper body and footwell, depending on the adjusted temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences. Pressing the AUTO button automatically switches on the cooling function. A condensation sensor simultaneously controls the programme so that condensation is avoided as far as possible.

The programme is deactivated if the air distribution is manually set or the button is pressed again.

Intensity of the AUTO program If the AUTO programme is activated, the automatic regulation of air flow rate and air distribution can be changed: Press the button on the left to reduce the intensity. Press the right side of the button to increase it. The adjusted intensity is indicated on the display of the automatic air conditioning system.

Adjusting air flow manually Switch off the AUTO programme first to be able to adjust the air flow rate manually. Press the left side of the button to reduce air flow. Press the right side of the button to increase it. If necessary, the air flow rate is reduced - up to and including switching off - to prevent battery discharge. The display remains unchanged.

Automatic Air Recirculation Control AUC/recirculated-air mode In the event of unpleasant odours or pollutants in the outside air, the supply of outside air can be deactivated. The air inside the vehicle is recirculated. Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode: > LEDs off: outside air is constantly entering the vehicle. > Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the deactivation automatically. > Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode: outside air supply is shut off permanently. In the event of condensation, switch off the recirculated-air mode and increase the air flow rate, if applicable. Make sure the air can flow to the windscreen.


Currently set temperature on the driver's side is also set on the front enger's side. The temperature on the front enger's side is simultaneously adjusted if the temperature on the driver's side is changed. The programme is switched off if the setting is changed on the front enger's side or if the button is pressed again.

Defrosting windows

With the blower at its lowest setting, press the left side of the button to switch off the automatic airconditioning system. All indicator lights, except that for the rear window heating if it is on, go out. The outside air supply is deactivated as soon as the automatic air conditioning system is switched off. If the air quality deteriorates or the windscreen fogs over, switch on the system again and increase the air flow rate.<

Switching on Press any button except ALL or the rear window heater button to reactivate the automatic airconditioning system.

Ice and condensation are removed quickly from the windscreen and the front windows. For this purpose, also switch on the cooling function.

Ventilation

Cooling function Cooling the inside of the vehicle is only possible if the engine is running. Press the button. The air is cooled, dried and warmed up again, depending on the temperature setting.


Press the button.

Controls

Switching off

Driving hints

Press the button.

Switching the system on/off

Navigation

ALL programme

The heater is switched off automatically after a certain time.

1

Knurled wheels to open and close the air outlets continuously

2

Levers for changing the direction of the airflow

Depending on the outside conditions, the windscreen may fog up after the engine has been switched on.

Ventilation for cooling

Pressing the AUTO button automatically switches on the cooling function.

Set the outlets so that the air is directed at you, e.g. in a warmed up vehicle.


Communication

Using a button on the steering wheel, see page 11, you can change quickly between recirculated-air mode and the previously set operating mode.

Press the button.

Mobility

Using the button on the steering wheel*

Rear window heating

Reference

The recirculated-air mode should not be used continuously for lengthy periods, as the quality of the air inside the vehicle will otherwise gradually deteriorate.<

Climate

Draught-free ventilation Direct the outlets so that the air flows past you.

Microfilter/activated charcoal filter The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the incoming air. The activated charcoal filter cleans the incoming air from gaseous pollutants. This combined filter is changed by your Service during routine maintenance work.


Programming

The system replaces up to three different handheld transmitters of different remote-controlled units, such as garage doors or lighting systems. The signal of a hand-held transmitter can be programmed on one of the three memory buttons.

Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packaging or in the instructions supplied with the hand-held transmitter, you can assume that the remote control device will be compatible with the universal remote control. A list of compatible hand-held transmitter is available from: > The internet: www.homelink.com > The toll-free HomeLink hotline: 0800 0466 35465 or alternatively the telephone number +49 6838 907 277 is available in , subject to charges

LED, arrow 2

Fixed-code hand-held transmitter 1. Switch on the ignition, see page 50. 2. Initial operation: Press the outer buttons 1 and 3 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED flashes. All programmes on the memory buttons, arrow 2, have been deleted. 3. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 5 cm to 20 cm or 2 in to 7 in. 4. Press the transmitter button of the handheld transmitter and the universal remote control simultaneously. LED flashes slowly. 5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes quickly. If the LED does not flash quickly after approx. 15 seconds, change the distance and repeat the last step.

Navigation

During the programming operation and before a programmed system is operated with the universal remote control, make sure that no persons, animals or objects are within the pivoting or movement range of the system in question, as otherwise injury or damage could result. Comply also with the safety instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter.<

2

Entertainment

For your safety, delete the memorised programmes before selling the vehicle.

Memory buttons, arrow 1

Communication

Transmission of the signal is shown by the LED.

1

Installation can be carried out with the engine running or the ignition turned on.

Malfunction If the system cannot be used after repeatedly programming it, check if the hand-held transmitter is equipped with an alternating code system. For this purpose: 95


Mobility

Subsequently you are able to operate the respective unit with the programmed memory button.

Driving hints

Controls

The principle

Reference

Integrated universal remote control*

Overview

Interior equipment

Interior equipment

> Read the instructions of the hand-held transmitter.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes quickly.

> Press the memory button of the universal remote control for a longer period of time. If the LED briefly flashes quickly and then lights up for approx. 2 seconds, the hand-held transmitter is equipped with an alternating code system. In this case, programme the memory buttons as described under alternating-code hand-held transmitter.

Alternating-code hand-held transmitter Please refer to the instructions of the unit to be programmed for information on the possibility of synchronisation.

If the LED does not flash quickly after approx. 15 seconds, change the distance and repeat the last step.

Deleting all stored programs Press the left and right memory button for approx. 20 seconds until the LED flashes quickly. All memorised programs are deleted. The programmes cannot be deleted individually.

Digital com*

Programming will be easier if another person is available to assist you. 1. Park the vehicle within the range of the remote controlled unit. 2. Programme the universal remote control as described above under fixed-code handheld transmitter. 3. Establish the location of the button on the receiver of the device to be operated, e.g. on the drive system. 4. Press the button on the receiver of the device to be operated. Approximately 30 seconds remain for the next step. 5. Press the programmed memory button of the universal remote control three times. The unit can be operated with a running engine or the ignition switched on.

Reasg individual programs 1. Switch on ignition. 2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 5 cm to 20 cm or 2 in to 7 in. 3. Press the memory button of the universal remote control. 4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit button of the hand-held transmitter.

1

Adjustment button

2

Display

The display shows you the cardinal or intermediate com direction in which you are currently driving.

Operating principle You can call up various functions by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object such as a pen or similar item. The following adjustment options are displayed one after the other, depending on how long you keep the adjustment button pressed: > Press briefly: switch display on/off > 3 to 6 seconds: set the com zone > 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the com > 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand steering > 12 to 15 seconds: set the language


can function correctly; refer to the map of the world with com zones below.

Press the adjustment button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of the com zone set is shown in the display.

and that you have enough space to drive in a circle.

The digital com must be calibrated in the following situations:

Setting right-hand/left-hand steering

> An incorrect com direction is shown.

The digital com is factory-set to right-hand or left-hand steering.

> The com direction shown does not change although the direction of travel does. > Not all com directions are displayed.

Procedure 1. Make sure that no large metal objects or overhead power lines are near your vehicle

Set the language Press the adjustment button for approx. 12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment button again to switch between English, "E", and German, "O". The setting is automatically saved after approx. 10 seconds.


Mobility

The com is operational again after approx. 10 seconds.

Entertainment

Calibrating the digital com

3. Press the adjustment button for approx. 6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive round at least one full circle at a speed of no more than 7 km/h, approx. 4 mph. If calibration is successful the C disappears and is replaced by the points of the com.

Communication

2. Set the com zone that currently applies.

Reference

To change the zone setting, briefly press the adjustment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the com zone corresponding to the current location.

Navigation

Driving hints

Controls

Set the com zone corresponding to your vehicle's geographic location, so that the com-

Overview

Setting com zones

Interior equipment

Glove box

Front centre arm rest*

Opening

Storage compartment Depending on the version, the centre armrest between the front seats contains either a compartment with a drinks holder* or the cover for the snap-in adapter*. For more information on this mobile phone fixture, see page 177.

Opening*

Pull the handle. The light in the glove box comes on. After using the glove box while the vehicle is moving, close its lid without delay, so that it cannot cause injury in the event of an accident.< Lift up the centre arm rest, see arrow.

Closing Swing lid up.

Adjusting

USB interface for data transfer

Push the centre arm rest in the desired position. Connection for importing and exporting data on a USB medium, e.g. music collections, see page 159. When connecting, bear the following in mind: > Do not force the connector into the USB interface. > Do not connect any devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface. > Do not connect USB hard disks. > Do not use the USB audio interface for charging external devices.

Rear centre arm rest* Reach into the recessed handle, pull to the front and fold down the centre arm rest. Press the centre arm rest firmly into the rear seat back rest.

Connection for external audio device An external audio device, e.g. a CD or MP3 player, can be connected.


> Glove box, see page 98 > Compartments in the centre console > Compartments in the doors > Bottle holders in the doors, see drinks holders on page 99

With partition net*: align the partition elements so that there is enough space in the rear of the storage compartment to place the partition net. > Storage nets in the luggage compartment next to the storage compartment

Luggage area

Coat hooks

> Lashing eyes, see page 112

Clothes hooks are located near the handles at the back.

> Storage compartment under the floor , see page 104 > Storage compartment on the left* and right > Bag holder, see page 104

Storage area package* For your convenience, there are:

On the inside > Insertable drinks holders, see page 100 > Front centre arm rest, see page 98 > Nets on the backrests of the front seats > Tensioning straps in the front door storage compartments > Storage compartment for glasses on the front enger side instead of a handle Reach into the recessed handle at the storage compartment for glasses and fold open. Fold upwards to close. Do not use the storage compartment for glasses as a handle. > Centre armrest with integrated drinks holder

Hang clothes so that they do not obstruct vision while driving.< Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks, as they could endanger the vehicle's occupants, e.g. already in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<

Drinks holders Notes Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not place hot drinks in them. Otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.< Do not force containers that are too large into the drinks holders; otherwise damage could result.<

Front > In the storage compartments in the doors as bottle holders, e.g. for 1.0 litre bottles Tilt the bottom of the bottle while placing it in the bottle holder. > In the centre armrest 99


Overview Controls

On the inside

Driving hints

Storage facilities

Navigation

> Insertable partition elements for the storage compartment underneath the floor for a variable partitioning of the storage compartment

Entertainment

Storage compartments

> Tensioning straps on the luggage compartment floor

Communication

> Tensioning straps on the left side to secure small items

Mobility

Luggage area

> USB audio interface*/additional connection of a the music player in the mobile phone*, see page 160

Reference

> AUX-IN port, see page 160

Interior equipment

Insertable drinks holder*

Ashtray/lighter*

The insertable drinks holder is located in the compartment under the centre armrest*.

Opening

Place the drinks holder in the at the centre console.

Lift the lid 2.

Rear

Lift out the insert.

> At the front in the storage compartments in the doors, e.g. 0.75 litre bottles

Lighter

Tilt the bottom of the bottle while placing it in the bottle holder. > In the centre armrest*

Emptying

Press the lighter 1 when the engine is running or the ignition is on. The cigarette lighter can be pulled out when it pops back out. Hold the hot cigarette lighter only by its knob, otherwise you may get burnt. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the remote control so that children cannot operate the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<

Press the front of the armrest.

Connecting electrical appliances Sockets Lighter holder can be used as a socket for electrical devices up to approx. 200 W at 12 V when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. Do not damage the sockets by attempting to insert unsuitable plugs.


The covers can be removed to store bulky luggage.

Rear centre console*

Rear cover 1. Unfasten the retaining straps at the tailgate. 2. Lift the cover a little, arrow 1, and pull out of the brackets to the back, arrows 2.

Navigation

Remove the cover or the lighter*.

Remove the cover or the lighter*.

In the storage compartment underneath the centre arm rest* Access to the socket: Remove the cover.

Overview

Do not place any objects on the cover, as they could endanger the vehicle's occupants, e.g. already in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<

Controls

Luggage compartment cover

Driving hints

Luggage area

Front cover 1. Press the cover out of the rear brackets simultaneously, arrow.

Communication

In the luggage compartment*

Entertainment

Front centre console

Expanding the luggage area The rear seat backrest is split in a 40-20-40 ratio. The backrests can be adjusted or folded in 10 steps between the comfortable and transport position, as required. 101 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Reference

Open the cap.

Mobility

2. Pull the cover back and upwards to remove it from the lateral brackets.

Interior equipment

In the comfortable position the backrests are in the far back position, in the transport position they are approx. in vertical position. Please observe the information on child restraint systems as from page 45 before fitting such a system. Comply with the instructions regarding seat belts on page 41, or there will be greater risks to personal safety.<

Outer backrests

Folding back the backrests When folding back the backrests from the folded position they anchor in the transport position. Pull the left/right backrest or loop of the centre backrest to the front to adjust the desired backrest inclination or comfortable position. Engage and therefore lock the backrests before travelling with any persons on the rear seats. Otherwise there is the risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the backrests.<

Partition net* Please make sure that the partition net is firmly hooked in, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury.< The partition net can be installed behind the front or the back seats. 1. Reach into the recess and pull the lever to the front. 2. Anchor or fold the backrest in the desired position. On the left side, the outer and centre backrest are brought to the front together if both backrests are in the same position. The backrests may be individually adjusted to the back. In this context, you must observe that the inclination of the centre backrest cannot be positioned behind the left backrest.

Centre backrest only

Before installation 1. Remove the pouch with the partition net from the storage compartment under the floor in the storage compartment. 2. Remove the partition net from the pouch, roll it out and extend. After using the partition net, fold and roll it together and place in the pouch in the same way that you unfolded it so you can store it under the floor . In this context, please make sure that hooks and tensioning buckles are not placed on the bars. 3. Unfold the partition net until the bars engage.

Mounting eyes There are four mounting eyes on the rear of the rear seat backrests.

1. Pull the loop, arrow. 2. Anchor or fold the backrest in the desired position. 102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Controls

Overview

Installation behind the rear seats 1. If applicable, move the rear backrest to the front, remove the luggage compartment cover, see page 101. 2. Fold open the caps 1 of the rear mounts in the roof lining until they engage. 1. Folding rear seats, see enlarge luggage compartment. 2. Fold open the front mounts in the roof lining until they engage. 3. Insert the partition net bar into the mounts up to the stop on both sides and push to the front. 3. Insert the bar of the partition net 2 on both sides up to the stop and push to the front.

Driving hints

Installation behind the front seats

Navigation

A corresponding label is attached to the partition net.

4. Attach the lower hooks on both sides of the retaining straps into the top lashing eyes on the rear seat backrest. 5. Firmly lash the partition net. For this purpose, tension the tensioning straps with the buckles.

Removing Please proceed in the opposite sequence to remove and stow away the partition net. > Press both unlocking buttons to fold it together, arrows. 103 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Entertainment

Please observe the correct installation of the partition net, i.e. confusing installation in the front and back.

5. Firmly lash the partition net. For this purpose, tension the tensioning straps with the buckles.

Communication

Label

Mobility

> Installation behind the rear seats, arrows 2

4. Hook in the hooks 1 into the lashing eyes on the rear seat backrest at the bottom of the retaining straps on both sides, arrow.

Reference

> Installation behind the front seats, arrows 1

Interior equipment

If required, you can remove the floor .

Lashing eyes There are lashing eyes in the luggage area for securing luggage items with nets or tensioning straps, see page 112.

Bag holders Floor Storage compartment under the floor Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of 25 kg or 55 lbs for the storage compartment under the floor , as otherwise damage could result.< Lift the storage compartment at the back, e.g. to gain access to the on-board toolkit. To lift, reach into the recess on the back part of the floor . The storage compartment can be removed, if required.

Raising the floor

Holder on the left and right at the for the luggage compartment cover, arrow, e.g. to hang shopping bags or carrier bags. Please only attach light or suitable items to the holders. Otherwise there is a risk of items flying around, e.g. when braking or when an avoidance manoeuvre is necessary. Only transport heavy luggage appropriately secured in the luggage area.<

Ski and snowboard bag* General The ski and snowboard bag is located in a protective cover in the luggage compartment. Please observe the assembly and operating instructions enclosed in the protective cover. Reach under the floor at the back on the left and right, lift the and press to the front underneath the gap between the luggage compartment floor and the rear seat backrest. To avoid damage do not apply any load on the floor when it is raised and do not press it up or downwards or readjust the rear seat backrests.< Lower the floor before closing the tailgate. For this purpose, pull the floor to the back at the top of the gap. 104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

105

Reference


Mobility

Communication

Entertainment

Navigation

Driving hints

Controls

Overview


Driving hints Here is a variety of information that you may need in particular driving situations or operating modes.


Driving precautions

Driving precautions Running in

maximum efficiency. Operate the clutch gently while running it in.

General Moving parts require some time before they can interact smoothly with one another. The following instructions are intended to help you ensure that your vehicle achieves its optimum service life and economy.

Engine and final drive Observe the national speed limits in the country in which you are travelling.

Up to 2000 km, approx. 1250 miles Driving with changing maximum engine speeds and speeds: > With petrol engine, 4500 rpm or 160 km/h, approx. 100 mph > With diesel engine, 3500 rpm or 150 km/h, approx. 94 mph Avoid full throttle and do not use the automatic gearbox kick-down.

From 2000 km, approx. 1250 miles, onwards Engine and road speeds can be gradually increased.

Tyres New tyres do not achieve their full road grip immediately, for production reasons. Drive in a restrained manner for the first 300 km, approx. 200 miles.

Brakes Brake pads and discs do not achieve a favourable wear and pattern until the vehicle has covered approx. 500 km or 300 miles.

Clutch The clutch needs to be run in for approx. 500 km or 300 miles, before it will operate with

After fitting new parts The same running-in instructions should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be replaced in the course of the vehicle's service life.

Saving fuel General Your vehicle is equipped with comprehensive technologies to reduce consumption and emission levels. The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends on various factors. Some measures, for example driving style and regular routine maintenance, can have an influence on fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Remove loaded items that are not required Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attachment parts after use After use, remove additional mirrors, roof racks or rear racks that are not required. Attachment parts on the vehicle diminish the aerodynamics and increase fuel consumption.

Close windows and panorama glass roof* An opened panorama glass roof or open windows also increases the drag and thus fuel consumption.

Regularly check tyre pressure Check, and if necessary correct the tyre inflation pressure at least twice a month and before setting off on a longer journey, see page 193.


Switch off functions that are not absolutely necessary at the moment

You should also maintain an appropriate gap between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. An anticipatory and even driving style reduces fuel consumption.

Functions such as seat or rear window heating require a considerable amount of energy and additionally consume fuel, especially in innercity traffic and stop & go traffic situations.

Avoid high engine speeds

For this reason, switch these functions off if they are not really required.

Only use 1st gear for driving off. As of 2nd gear, accelerate quickly. In doing so, avoid high engine speeds and upshift at an early stage.

Have routine maintenance work carried out

When you reach the desired speed, shift to the highest possible gear and drive at low engine speed and constant speed, if possible.

Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve optimal economy and service life. Have routine maintenance work carried out by your Service.

As a general principle, the following applies: driving at lower engine speed lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.

Please also observe the BMW maintenance system, see page 202.

The gearshift point display* indicates the gear with the most favourable fuel consumption, see page 64.

Use the coasting mode On approaching a red traffic light, take your foot of the accelerator and allow the vehicle roll to a stop.

General driving notes Closing the tailgate Drive only with the tailgate closed; otherwise exhaust gases could enter the enger compartment.<


Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking operations.

Navigation

Use an anticipatory driving style

The automatic start/stop function* switches the engine off automatically during a stop. For more information on the automatic start/stop function, refer to page 52.

Entertainment

This is the quickest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

You will save fuel even if the engine is only off for approx. 4 seconds.

Communication

Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle at a standstill; it is preferable to set off straight away, driving at moderate engine speeds.

When you stop the vehicle for longer periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railway crossings or in traffic jams, switch off the engine.

If you must drive with an open tailgate:

On downhill gradients, take your foot off the accelerator and allow the vehicle to roll.

1. Close all windows and the panorama glass roof*.

In the coasting mode, the flow of fuel is cut off.

2. Increase the air volume from the automatic air-conditioning system considerably, see page 92.


Mobility

Drive off immediately

Switch off the engine during longer stops

Reference

Insufficient tyre inflation pressure heightens the rolling resistance and thus increases fuel consumption and tyre wear.

Driving precautions

Hot exhaust system High temperatures develop in the exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields or apply underseal to them. Make sure that when the vehicle is driven or parked and when the engine is idling, no easily flammable material such as hay, leaves, grass etc. comes into with the hot exhaust pipe. It could ignite and cause a fire, with the risk of severe injuries or damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes; otherwise there is a risk of burns.<

Diesel particle filter* The diesel particle filter collects soot particles and burns them periodically at high temperatures.

vehicle cannot be steered or the brake properly applied. Reduce speed on wet or muddy roads to avoid aquaplaning.<

Driving through water Only drive through calm waters and only up to a maximum water depth of 30 cm, approximately 12 inch. In this depth do not exceed walking speed of up to 10 km/h, approx. 6 mph. Do not exceed water depth and walking speed, otherwise damage to the engine, electronics system and gearbox could occur.<

Apply the handbrake on uphill gradients

> The engine will temporarily not run as smoothly.

Never try to prevent the vehicle from rolling back on an uphill gradient by slipping the clutch for a longer period; always apply the handbrake. The clutch will otherwise wear rapidly.<

> A slightly higher engine speed is necessary for normal performance.

In vehicles with 6-cylinder engines, the drive-off assistant offers additional help, see page 80.

> Noises and a slight amount of smoke may emerge from the exhaust until shortly after the engine is switched off.

Safe braking

For Australia/New Zealand: radio signals

Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations in which this is necessary.

During the cleaning period which takes a few minutes:

The vehicle's performance may be affected by interference from high frequency radio signals. Such signals are emitted by certain transmitting devices, for example, aircraft navigation beacons or mobile telephone relay stations. We recommend you consult your Authorised BMW Dealer should you experience any difficulties.<

Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as standard.

The vehicle can still be steered. To manoeuvre around possible obstructions, try to steer as steady as possible. A pulsating brake pedal and noises from the hydraulic control unit indicate that ABS is in operation.

Wet roads

Aquaplaning

In wet conditions, brake slightly and at regular intervals after a few kilometres.

A water front may develop between the tyres and the road surface on wet or muddy roads.

Make sure not to obstruct other road s when doing so.

This situation, known as aquaplaning, means that the tyre can actually lose with the road surface completely or partially, so that the

The resulting heat dries the brake discs and pads. The braking force will then be available immediately if needed.


Make sure that pedal functions are not impaired by floor mats, carpets or other objects.<

Corrosion on the brake disc Corrosion of the brake disc and soiling of the brake pads is caused by: > Low mileage > Long downtimes > Low strain The minimum stress required for self-cleaning is not achieved. When the brakes are applied, corroded discs tend to cause juddering, which usually cannot be rectified.

Condensation in a parked vehicle Moisture condensate forms in the automatic air-conditioning system and is discharged underneath the vehicle. Traces of water on the ground are therefore normal.

For Australia/New Zealand: towing The Australian/New Zealand Standards AS 4177.1-2004 'Caravan and light trailer tow-

Rule of the road When entering countries where the traffic drives on the opposite side of the road to the country in which your vehicle is ed, certain measures are necessary to avoid dazzling the drivers of oncoming vehicles. Your Service will provide you with headlight converters. Note the instructions enclosed with the film when applying. If headlight converters have been applied, turn the light switch into position 5 to switch on the low-beam headlights, see page 86.

Load Do not overload the vehicle in order not to exceed the permissible load bearing capacity of the tyres. The tyres could then overheat and sustain internal damage. Under certain circumstances this can cause sudden tyre pressure loss.< Make sure that no fluids are leaking in the luggage area. Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.< 111



BMW Group Australia does not recommend or the installation and use of a Weight Distribution Hitch or Load Levelling on any BMW Group vehicle. The use of such devices may affect the vehicle's warranty status.

Navigation

never drive with the clutch held down, with the gearbox in neutral or with the engine switched off; engine braking action will not be present, or there will be no power assistance to the brakes or steering.<

As all BMW Group towbar assemblies are designed, tested and approved as a single unit, the practice of modifying or replacing the BMW supplied towball mount assembly is not approved. Use only the genuine BMW towball mount assembly.

Entertainment

Avoid unnecessary strain on the brakes. Otherwise even slight, continuous pressure on the brake pedal could cause overheating, brake pad wear or even brake system failure.<

Communication

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down through the gears all the way to first gear, if necessary. Downshifting in manual mode of the automatic gearbox, see page 55.

Mobility

On long or steep downhill gradients, drive in the gear that requires the least amount of braking. Otherwise the brake system can overheat and the braking effect will be reduced.

ing components – Towbars and towing brackets' includes the following statement which BMW Group Australia herewith adopts: "FOR TRAILER TOWING ONLY". The towbar supplied with your BMW vehicle should only be used for towing purposes, the towbar assembly should not be used in conjunction with any towbar-mounted carrying device, such as, for example, a bicycle carrying rack.

Reference

Downhill gradients

Driving precautions

Loading > Heavy loads: position heavy objects as low and as far forward as possible, ideally directly behind the respective seat backs. > Very heavy loads: put the outside seat belts in the opposite buckle respectively if the back seat is empty. > Wrap protective material round sharp corners and edges.

> Use the partition net to protect engers, see page 102. Make sure that objects cannot poke through the partition net.

lashing eyes on the back wall of the luggage compartment, arrows 2. Always stow and secure the load as described above, so that it cannot endanger the vehicle's occupants, for example if sudden braking or an avoidance manoeuvre is necessary. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loosely inside the vehicle, since they could be dislodged, for example by heavy braking, a sudden avoidance manoeuvre or similar, and endanger the occupants. Do not exceed the vehicle's permitted gross weight or the axle load limits, see page 225, otherwise the vehicle's operating safety may be endangered and the construction and use regulations infringed. Use only the lashing eyes that are illustrated to secure lashing straps. Do not secure any objects with the upper attachment points for ISOFIX, see page 47, as otherwise these could be damaged.<

> Do not stack items higher than the top edge of the seat backs.

Roof rack*

> Wrap appropriate protective material around objects that could strike the rear window while the vehicle is on the move.

Roof rack system available as an optional accessory

Securing the load

A special roof rack system is available as an optional accessory. Please observe the directions contained in the installation instructions.

Mounting points Mounting points are situated on the roof rails*.

Installation > Smaller and lighter items: secure with tensioning straps, a luggage compartment net* or other suitable straps* .

Make sure that there is enough clearance for lifting and opening the panorama glass roof*.

Load

> Large and heavy items: secure with loadsecuring equipment*.

A loaded roof rack alters the vehicle's road behaviour and steering response, by moving its centre of gravity.

> Load-securing equipment can be fastened to two lashing eyes on the side wall of the luggage compartment, arrows 1 and two

For this reason, please observe the following when loading and driving:


engine cooling system, depending on the model.

> Spread the roof load evenly.

Before a journey

Rear luggage rack*

Permissible gross vehicle weight of the pulling vehicle, which can be found in the technical documentation, must not be exceeded by this.

A special rear luggage rack is available as an optional accessory. A trailer tow hitch is not required for this purpose.

Load

Please observe the directions contained in the installation instructions.

Mounting points

Stow the load as low as possible and near the axle. A low centre of trailer gravity makes the outfit much more stable and safe to drive. The permissible gross vehicle weight of the trailer and the permissible axle load of the vehicle must not be exceeded, see technical data. The respective smaller value is the limit which should be adhered to.

Tyre pressure Please observe the tyre inflation pressure of the vehicle and the trailer. The securing points are located under the covers in the bumper. Removing the covers, see page 219.

Trailer towing* General The permissible trailer load is stated in the technical documentation. Your Service will inform you of possibilities to improve it. The vehicle is equipped with an enforced rear axle suspension and with a more powerful

The tyre inflation pressure for higher loads must be applied, see page 193. With trailers, the instructions of the trailer manufacturer should be adhered to.

Run Flat Indicator Reinitialise the Run Flat Indicator after correcting the tyre pressure and attaching/detaching the trailer, see page 80.

Outside mirrors Two outside mirrors that bring both rear corners of the trailer into your field of view are required by law. These types of mirrors are available as an optional accessory from Service. 113


Controls

> Drive smoothly and avoid violent acceleration, braking or cornering.

Driving hints

If possible, exploit these values. The weight of the trailer tow hitch and the nose weight reduce the maximum payload. The nose weight increases the vehicle weight.

Navigation

> Maximum towbar load: 80 kg or 177 lbs

Entertainment

> No not place any items in the movement range of the tailgate.

> Minimum towbar load: 25 kg or 55 lbs

Communication

> Secure the roof rack correctly and safely.

Nose weight

Mobility

> Place heavy items at the bottom.

Reference

> Roof load area may not be too large.

Overview

> Do not exceed the permissible roof/axle load and the permissible gross vehicle weight, see page 225.

Driving precautions

Electrical consumers

Trailer Stability Control*

The power output of the trailer's rear lights must not exceed the following values:

The principle

> Flashing turn indicators: 42 W on each side

The system helps you to counter the trailer's tendency to swing from side to side.

> Rear lights: 60 W on each side > Brake lights: 84 W total > Rear fog lights: 42 W total > Reversing lights: 42 W total Only keep the energy consumers on for a short time when towing a caravan, so as to preserve the vehicle battery. Check the rear lights of the trailer before setting off, otherwise there is a risk of endangering other road s.<

Towing a trailer Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, approx. 50 mph, otherwise the trailer may start to snake, depending on design and load.<

Counteracting snaking If the trailer begins to snake, the outfit can only be stabilised by braking hard immediately. It is essential to carry out necessary steering corrections as carefully as possible and with regard for other road s.

It detects snaking movements and promptly brakes the vehicle so that road speeds fall to below the critical range and the outfit is stabilised. If the power socket for the trailer is in use but no trailer is attached, for example during use of a bicycle carrier with lights, the system may become active in extreme driving situations.

Operating requirements The system functions whenever a trailer is towed and connected to the corresponding power socket, at road speeds of approx. 65 km/h, approx. 40 mph and above.

System limitations > The system cannot intervene if the trailer veers instantly, e.g. on slippery or loose road surfaces. > Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip over before any snaking motion is detected. > The system is not operational if DSC is deactivated or fails, see page 78.

Gradients In the interest of safety and to avoid holding up other traffic, do not attempt to climb gradients steeper than 12Ξ when towing a trailer.

Trailer tow hitch with removable ball head*

If higher axle loads have been approved retrospectively, the limit is 8Ξ.

General

Downhill gradients

Take care of the removable ball head according to the operating manual of the manufacturer to ensure smooth assembly or disassembly.

The outfit tends to snake more easily on downhill gradients. Shift into the next lower gear before the downhill gradient and drive down slowly.

Storage The removable ball head is stored in the luggage compartment under the floor and the storage compartment.

Mounting and dismounting Procedure for mounting and dismounting the removable ball head is described in the 114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

The vehicle is in its element on all kinds of road surfaces. It combines all-wheel drive* with the advantages of a normal vehicles. Do not drive on loose ground otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.<

Overview

Please observe the following after driving on poor road surfaces to ensure the road safety of the vehicle: > Remove dirt from the vehicle. > Remove mud, snow, ice etc. from the vehicle and check tyres for damage.

Driving hints

To ensure your own safety, the safety of engers and of the vehicle please observe the following when driving on poor road surfaces:

Controls

Driving on poor road surfaces

> If the drive wheels slip on one side, depress the accelerator so that the driving stability control systems can distribute drive force to the individual wheels.

> Familiarise yourself with the vehicle before setting off and do not take any risk. > Adapt your speed to the road conditions. Drive slower the steeper and more uneven the road surface gets.

Navigation

> Make sure that engine oil and coolant level are near the MAX mark before driving on very steep downhill or uphill gradients, see page 197.

Entertainment

> Use Hill Descent Control HDC* on very steep downhill gradients, see page 79. > While driving, watch out for obstructions like, e.g. boulders and potholes and try to avoid these if possible.

Communication

> Avoid the body coming into with the road surface, e.g. on bumpy roads or hilltops. The vehicle has a maximum ground clearance of approx. 20 cm or 7.9 in. Please note that ground clearance depends on the load and the driving conditions of the vehicle. > Only drive through water on roads that is a maximum of 30 cm or 11.8 in deep and do not stop. Do not exceed walking speed.

Mobility

> After driving through water at low speed, gently operate the brake a few times so that the brake can dry and a reduction of braking effect due to moisture is prevented. > Depending on the road condition it may be advisable to briefly activate DTC, see Dynamic Traction Control DTC on page 78.


Reference

enclosed operating manual of the manufacturer.


Navigation This chapter describes how you can enter destinations and choose your route, so that your navigation system guides you reliably to your destination.


Navigation system

Navigation system* General The navigation system can determine the precise position of the vehicle by means of satellites and guide you reliably to any specified destination. Only enter data when the vehicle is standing still, and always obey the actual traffic regulations and road signs in the event of any contradiction between the traffic situation and the instructions given by the navigation system. Failure to do so may result in a violation of traffic laws and put the vehicle's occupants and other road s at risk.<

Professional navigation system: Updating navigation data Inserting navigation DVD 1. Insert the navigation DVD in the DVD player with the labelled side upwards. 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Display. 3. Enter the enable code of the navigation DVD and, if necessary, change the DVD.

Removing navigation DVD

Navigation data General Navigation data are saved in the vehicle and can be updated. Your BMW Service can provide you with navigation data and enable code. Updating the data can take several hours depending on the data volume.

1.

Press button 1. The DVD is ejected part way out of the drive.

> Data is updated when the vehicle is in motion.

2. Remove the DVD.

> The update will automatically continue after a break in the journey.

Business navigation system: Updating navigation data

> Basic navigation functions are available while the vehicle is in motion.

1. Insert USB device with navigation data into the USB interface in the glove box.

> Data is saved in the vehicle.

2. Follow the instructions on the Control Display.

> The system restarts after the update. > The medium with navigation data can be removed after updating.

3. Enter the enable code of the USB device with the navigation data.

Fetching information on navigation data 1. "Navigation" 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Navigation system version": Information regarding the version of the data is displayed. 118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

You can choose from the following options for entering a destination:

Overview

Destination input 3. "Destination input"

> Entering a destination manually, see below

> Destination input with BMW Assist*, see page 123 You can also store a navigation destination on the favourites buttons, see page 19. Only enter data when the vehicle is standing still, and always obey the actual traffic regulations and road signs in the event of any contradiction between the traffic situation and the instructions given by the navigation system. Otherwise, you risk endangering the safety of the engers in your vehicle and other road s.<

In addition, the system s you with the following special features: > If you do not enter a street name, you will be guided to the centre of the town or city. > You can skip input of the country, town or city if you wish to retain previous inputs.

Entering a country 1. "Navigation" 2. "Destination input" 3. Select "Country" or the country displayed.

Entering a town/city 1. Select "City" or town/city displayed.

The wordmatch principle, see page 128, makes the input of place-names and streets easier. This makes it possible to enter different spellings, and names are completed automatically so that stored place-names and streets can be called up quickly.

Communication

Entering a destination manually

2. Select letters, if applicable.

1. Press the MENU button.

To delete letters:

2. "Navigation"

> To delete individual letters: Turn the controller until is highlighted and press the controller. > To delete all letters: Turn the controller until


is high-

Mobility

> Entering a destination via voice commands*, see page 125

Reference

> Selecting home address, see page 122

Navigation

> Entering a destination via map, see page 124

Entertainment

> Last destinations, see page 122 > Points of interest, see page 122

Driving hints

Controls

> Selecting a destination from the address book, see page 121

Destination input

lighted and press the controller for longer than usual. To enter spaces: > Select the

symbol.

The list is gradually narrowed down with every subsequent letter that you enter. 3. Jog the controller to the right. 4. Select a town/city name from the list. If there are several places with the same name: 1. Move to the list of place names.

Entering a road/street without a destination town/city You can also enter a street without entering a town or city. In this case, all streets in the entered country are offered. The respective town or city is shown after the street name. If a town or city has been entered already, this entry can be cancelled. This may be useful in instances where the desired street cannot be found in the entered town or city because it belongs to a different district, for example.

2. Highlight town/city. For Professional navigation system: A preview is displayed.

1. "Navigation"

3. Select the town/city.

4. Move to the list of street names.

Entering the postcode

2. "Destination input" 3. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 5. Select "In" with country currently displayed.

1. Select "City" or the town/city displayed. 2. Select the

symbol.

3. Select digits. 4. Move to the list of postal codes and towns/ cities. 5. Highlight the postal code. For Professional navigation system: A preview is displayed. 6. Select the postcode.

Entering a street and junction 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 2. Enter the road/street and junction in the same way as town/city. After entering the street, you can add the junction or house number. If there are several streets with the same name: 1. Move to the list of street names.

6. Select the letters. 7. Move to the list of street names. 8. Highlight the street. For Professional navigation system: A preview is displayed. 9. Select the street.

Entering a house number You may enter any house number that is stored in the navigation data for the street in question.

2. Highlight the street. For Professional navigation system: A preview is displayed.

1. "Building number"

3. Select the street.

4. Select the house number or a range of house numbers.

2. Select digits. 3. Move to the list of house numbers.


1. "Accept destination"

1. Call up "Options". 2. "Save as new " or "Add to existing ".

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

Overview

Starting route guidance after destination input

> Set "Route criteria", see page 129. Controls

> Search for "Points of interest at loc.", see page 122.

Address book

6. "Save in car"

Memorising position The current position can be stored in the address book. 1. "Navigation" 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Save position as a " or "Add position to ".

3. Select a from the list or use "A-Z search". 4. If applicable, select "Work address" or "Home address".

Storing a destination in the address book After destination input, save the destination in the address book.

4. Depending on the selection, either select an existing from the list or select the type of address and enter the surname and first name. 5. "Save in car"

Editing or deleting an address

Navigation

If s with addresses from the mobile phone or the BMW Online address book* are not displayed, these must first be checked as destinations, see page 179.

5. Enter "Surname" and "First name", if applicable.

Entertainment

2. "Address book" s with addresses are displayed if these addresses were checked as destinations.

4. Select "Work address" or "Home address".

Communication

1. "Navigation"

3. If applicable, select an existing .

Mobility

Selecting a destination from the address book

Driving hints

Creating s, see page 178.

2. "Address book"


Reference

1. "Navigation"

Destination input

3. Highlight the entry.

Editing a destination

4. Call up "Options".

Destinations can be edited, e.g. to change the house number in an existing entry.

5. "Edit in s" or "Delete entry".

1. "Navigation"

Accepting home address as destination The home address must be created as destination. See 'Defining a as home address', page 178. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" 3. "Home address"

2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Edit destination"

Deleting last destinations 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destinations".

Points of interest 4. "Start guidance"

You can search for points of interest, e.g. hotels and sights, and start route guidance to this location.

Last destinations

The scope of information and symbols depends on the respective navigation data.<

The last destinations reached are stored automatically. These destinations can be called up and incorporated into route guidance.

Calling up the search for points of interest

Calling up last destinations

1. "Navigation"

1. "Navigation"

2. "Points of interest" The search can be defined according to the location and type of the point of interest.

2. "Last destinations"

Location of the points of interest Search for a point of interest according to the location for a town/city or the route.

3. Select destination. 4. "Start guidance" 122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

> "At another place"

4. Select a point of interest.

> "Along the route"

5. Select the

> "At current location"

Category of the points of interest 1. "Category" 2. Select "All" or special category, e.g. hotels or restaurants.

Category details Additional details can be displayed for some point of interest in the navigation data, e.g. restaurant type, Italian.

symbol.

6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.". If a phone number has been stored, a telephone connection can be established.

Additional information via BMW Online* 1. "Navigation" 2. "Points of interest" 3. Select a point of interest. 4. Call up "Options".

"Category details"

5. "Further info (BMW Online)"

Destination input using BMW Assist* A connection to BMW information service is established, see page 181. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Destination input" 3. Call up "Options".

Overview Controls

> "At destination"

3. Highlight a point of interest. For Professional navigation system: The destination is displayed in the preview map.

2. Select search location of point of interest:

Driving hints

> Destinations in the selected category are displayed as symbols in the map view. The display depends on the map scale and the category.

Navigation

> "At destination", "At another place", "Along the route" Points of interest are sorted by their distance to the search location.

Entertainment

tance, with an arrow pointing in the direction of the destination.

Communication

1. "Search location"

4. "BMW Assist dest. input"

Entering points of interest by name

1. "Start search"

1. "Navigation"

2. The list of points of interest is displayed.

2. "Points of interest" 3. "Name, A-Z search" 4. Enter letters. Depending on the distance, the search can


Reference

> "At current location" Points of interest are displayed by dis-

Mobility

Starting the search for points of interest

Destination input

take some time. A maximum of 100 entries can be displayed in the list. 5. Move to the list of points of interest. 6. Highlight a point of interest. For Professional navigation system: The destination is displayed in the preview map. 7. Select a point of interest. 8. Select the

symbol.


Entering points of interest via Online search*

Entering a destination via map If you know only where a destination or road is located, you can use the map to enter the destination.

Calling up the map 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" A map section is displayed on the Control Display. The map shows the current position of the vehicle.

1. "Navigation"

Selecting a destination

2. "Points of interest"

1. Select the started.

3. "Online search"

symbol. "Interactive map" is

4. Select a point of interest. 5. Select the

symbol.


Displaying points of interest in the map To show symbols for the points of interest in the map: 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map"

2. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.

3. Call up "Options". 4. "Display points of interest"

> Change scale: turn the controller. > Move map: jog controller in the respective direction. > Move map diagonally: jog controller in the respective direction and press controller. 3. Press controller to display more menu items. > Select the symbol: "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

5. Select the settings.

> "Resume": back to map view. > "Search for points of int.": search for point of interest is started.


Say input

If the system does not find a street, a street name near the destination or its coordinates are displayed.

> Countries, towns/cities, streets and junctions can be spoken or spelt as whole words in the system language, see page 72.

> Say letters fluently and avoid unnecessary intonation and breaks.

Enter address* 1. Press the


2. {Destination input}

> Map view > "Display destination" Map section around the destination is displayed. > "Display current location" Map section around the current location is displayed. > "Search for points of int.", see page 122.

Entering a destination via voice commands*

4. Say town/city, street and house number in one sentence. 5. Proceed with input as requested by the system. 6. If required, say the parts of the address individually, e.g. town/city.

Entering a town/city The town/city can be spelt or entered as a whole word*. The input options depend on the navigation data and the country and language settings in each case.< 1. {City} or {Spell name of city}. 2. Wait for system request of town/city.

You can enter a desired destination via the voice control system. During destination entry, it is possible at any time to switch between voice commands and entries via iDrive; to do so, reactivate the voice control if necessary.

3. Say the name of the town/city or, if applicable, the first three letters of the town/city at minimum.

Mobility

General

Navigation

> "Exit interactive map"

3. Wait for system request.

Entertainment

> Select the symbol and "Start guidance", if applicable.

Controls

> Spell the input if language area and system language differ.

Driving hints

> Town/city, street and house number can also be spoken in one sentence.*

Communication

In the interactive map, the scale can be set and the map section shifted. Other functions are available by pressing the controller:

Example: to enter a town/city within as a whole word, the language of the system must be German.

With {Voice commands} you can have the possible commands read aloud.<


Reference

Interactive map

Overview

Specifying the street/road

Destination input

Up to 20 towns/cities are displayed, depending on the input.

Planning a journey

4. Select a town or city:

New trip

> Select one of the displayed towns/ cities: {Yes}

Various intermediate destinations can be entered for a trip.

> To select other town/city: {New entry}

1. "Navigation"

> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 2}

3. Jog controller to the left, if applicable.

> Spell entry: {Spell name of city}

4. Select the

Similar sounding towns/cities that the system cannot distinguish are grouped together in a separate list and displayed as one town/city with the three following points. If applicable, select this entry using {Yes}. Then select the desired town/city in that list.<

2. "Map" symbol.

5. "Enter new destination" 6. Select the type of destination input and enter the intermediate destination.

The town or city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: turn controller until you have selected the town/city and press controller.

Enter street or junction Streets or junctions are entered analogue to the town/place. 7. Enter an intermediate destination.

Entering a house number

8. "Start guidance"

You can enter house number up to 999: 1. {Building number} 2. Say the house number. 3. {Yes} to confirm house number. 4. "Accept destination"

Starting route guidance

Entering an intermediate destination A maximum of 30 intermediate destination can be entered. 1. "Enter new destination" 2. Select the type of destination input and enter the intermediate destination.

{Start guidance} Route guidance is started immediately.

Add additional intermediate destination {Add as another destination} Additional intermediate destinations can be added.

Storing a destination Destination is automatically transferred to the list of last destinations.

3. Select "Add as another dest.". 4. Select where to insert the intermediate destination.


Deleting an intermediate destination

After entering all intermediate destinations: "Start guidance"

1. "Map"

1. "Navigation"

4. "OK"

2. "Saved journeys"

The trip is stored in the trip list under the name that is entered.

3. Select desired trip.

For Professional navigation system: Start saved trip

5. "Delete all journeys" or "Delete journey".

1. "Navigation" 2. "Saved journeys" 3. Select desired trip. 4. "Start guidance"


For Professional navigation system: Importing trips using a USB medium 1. Switch on ignition. 2. Insert a USB medium in the USB interface in the glove box. 3. "Navigation"

Changing trips These functions are not available in the case of imported trips or Guided Tours.

Reversing the direction of a trip

4. "Saved journeys" 5. "Import journeys" 6. "USB" 7. "OK"

Intermediate destinations can be displayed in reverse sequence after route guidance has been started.

For Professional navigation system: Importing trips using BMW Online

1. "Map"

1. "Navigation"

2. "Guidance"

2. "Saved journeys"


3. "Import journeys"

4. "Reverse stage dest. order"

4. "BMW Online"

Reclassify intermediate destination 1. "Map" 2. "Guidance" 3. "Display all stage dest." 4. Select intermediate destination. 5. "Reposition stage dest."

For Professional navigation system: Guided tours General You can adopt recommended routes into the route guidance, e.g. holiday route.


Driving hints

3. Enter letters.

Navigation

For Professional navigation system: Deleting a trip

Entertainment

2. "Save journey"

Controls

5. "Delete stage destination"

Communication


4. Select intermediate destination.

Mobility

Up to 30 saved trips can be saved in the trip list.

3. "Display all stage dest."

Reference

For Professional navigation system: Saving a trip

2. "Guidance"

Overview

Starting the trip

Destination input

Starting guided tours 1. "Navigation" 2. "Saved journeys" 3. "Guided Tour search"

> When entering place-names or streets, the system completes the name automatically as soon as it has been identified beyond doubt. > The system offers only those letters for selection and entry that occur in names stored in the vehicle. This makes it impossible to enter incorrect names or unknown addresses.

4. Select "Country" and "Region" or search criteria: > "Search for name" > "Search for nearest Tour" 5. If applicable "Start search" 6. Select guided tour. 7. Select the

symbol.

8. "Start guidance"

Quit guided tours 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Select the

symbol.

4. "Stop guidance"

Wordmatch principle The wordmatch principle makes the input of place-names and streets easier. It compares your destination inputs continuously with the data stored in the vehicle, and reacts immediately. This has the following advantages for you: > You can input place-names in a form that may differ from the official version, provided that the alternative entry is familiar in another country or language. Example: Instead of the English version "Munich" you can input the German name "München" or the Italian version "Monaco". 128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

4. "Accept destination" 5. "Start guidance" The route will be displayed on the Control Display after it has been calculated. The distance to the destination/intermediate destination and the estimated time of arrival are shown in the map view.

Exiting route guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Select the

symbol.

4. "Stop guidance"

Altering route criteria

Overview

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Route criteria" 4. Select a criterion: > "Fast route": time-optimised route; combination of shortest possible distance and fast roads > "Efficient route": optimised combination of fastest and shortest route > "Short route": shortest distance without taking time into > "Alternative routes": suggestions of additional alternative routes during route guidance

Continuing route guidance Route guidance may be continued if you did not reach your destination during the last trip.

Communication

"Resume guidance"

Driving hints

3. Select destination.

For Professional navigation system: Route criteria cannot be changed for guided tours.

Navigation

2. "Destination input"

Entertainment

1. "Navigation"

The settings are saved for the remote control currently in use.

Route criteria General

Mobility

You can influence the route calculated by selecting various route criteria. You can change the route criteria as often as you like during destination input or during route guidance. The route is planned according to fixed rules. The type of road is also taken into , e.g. motorways or winding roads. For this reason, the route proposed by the system will not necessarily be the one the driver expects from experience.


Reference


Controls

Route guidance

Route guidance

5. If necessary, select supplementary route criteria. Where possible, these selected criteria are avoided on the route. > Avoid motorways, if possible: "Avoid motorways" > Avoid toll roads, if possible: "Avoid toll roads" > Avoid roads where toll vignettes are required, if possible: "Avoid pre-paid roads" > Avoid ferries, if possible: "Avoid ferries" The setting applies to the current route and the planning of other routes.

Dynamic route guidance "Dynamic guidance" is switched on: The route is automatically changed if a traffic obstruction is encountered. The system does not alert you to traffic obstructions on the original route. Depending on the type of road and the nature and length of the traffic congestion, the route can also be calculated in such a way that it cuts across the traffic congestion.

Displaying list of roads or towns/cities along the route With the route guidance started, a list of streets and towns/cities on the route is displayed. For each route stage, the distance to be driven and the traffic information are displayed. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Route profile" 3. Highlight the route stage. For Professional navigation system: The route stage is displayed in the preview map.

Avoiding sections of a route During route guidance, you can also instruct the navigation system to detour around sections of the route. You do this by specifying after how many kilometres of the original route you wish to return to it. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Route profile" 3. "New route for:"

Activating dynamic route guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Dynamic guidance" If route criteria "Avoid motorways", "Avoid toll roads", "Avoid pre-paid roads" or "Avoid ferries" are selected, calculation of the route may take longer.<

4. Turn the controller: enter desired number of kilometres or miles. 5. Press controller.

Course of route

Cancel bying

General

1. "Navigation"

Depending on the equipment version, various modes are available for displaying the course of the route during route guidance:

2. "Route profile"

> List of streets and towns/cities

Refuelling recommendation

> Map view, see page 131

The remaining range is calculated and service stations along the route are recommended.

To cease bying the section of route:

3. "Cancel new route"


3. "Recommended refuel" A list of service stations is displayed.

2. Turn the knob during the voice message until the desired volume is obtained.

Overview

2. "Route profile"

1. If necessary, have the last voice message repeated.

1. "Navigation"

4. Select a service station. symbol.

Route guidance by voice messages Switching voice messaging on/off Voice instructions can be switched on/off during route guidance. 1. "Navigation"

Voice information switched off For rapid access, it is a good idea to save items on a favourite button, see page 19.

Repeating spoken instruction 1. "Navigation"

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" The following functions are available directly in the map view: Symbol

Function Start/end route guidance

2. "Map" 3. Highlight the

You can have your current position shown on a map. After starting route guidance, the planned route is shown on the map.

symbol.

4. Press controller twice.

Adjusting the volume of the voice instructions* The volume can be adjusted only while a voice instruction is being issued.

Switching voice messaging on/off Changing route criteria or selecting a route alternative Points of interest

Entertainment

Voice information switched on

Displaying map view

Communication

Meaning

Displaying traffic information Interactive map Adjusting map view Changing the scale


Mobility

Symbol

symbol.

Navigation

Map view

2. "Map" 3. Select the


Driving hints

Controls


Reference

5. Select the

Route guidance

Information in the map view > Time, entertainment source, sound output, scale, alignment of the map > Distance to destination/intermediate destination, estimated time of arrival, if route guidance is active. > If there are traffic obstructions, these are highlighted in colour. To show/hide information on the map: Press controller.

View of the map 1.

Select the symbol.

2. Select a setting: > "North-oriented" > "Indicating dir. of travel" > "Perspective" > "Arrow view"

3. Set optimised map view. > "Day/night mode" Select by lighting conditions and make settings. This setting is ignored if "Traffic situation/grey map" is active. > For Professional navigation system: "Satellite images" Satellite images* are displayed in scales from 2 km to 1000 km, depending on availability and resolution. > For Professional navigation system: "Perspective view in 3D" Shows a three-dimensional image. Distinctive locations available in the navigation data are displayed on the map three dimensionally. > "Traffic situation/grey map" Map is optimised to display traffic information. Symbols for points of interest are no longer displayed.


Change map selection Select "Interactive map". > Move map: jog controller in the respective direction. > Move map diagonally: jog controller in the respective direction and press controller.

Changing the scale 1. Select the

symbol.

2. Turn the controller to change the scale.

Automatically set scale In the north-facing map view, turn the controller any direction until the scale indicator shows 'AUTO'. The map scale is selected in such a way that the current position and destination are shown on the map.

Settings for map view Map is displayed on the Control Display. 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Settings"

For Business navigation system: Arrow view An arrow view is displayed on the map of the Control Display. 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Arrow view on map"

For Professional navigation system: Map view for split screen The map view can be selected regardless of the main screen for split screen mode. 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Split screen" Split screen is switched on. 3. Jog the controller repeatedly to the right until the split screen content is selected. 4. Select map view: > "Arrow view" > "Map north-oriented" > "Map indicating dir. of travel" > "Map perspective" > "3D exit roads"


The traffic information is displayed in the map view.

Switching reception on/off 1. "Navigation" 2. Call up "Options". 3. Activate/deactivate "Receive traffic info".

Traffic information in a list The list of traffic information can be displayed via the map view or menu.

Calling up traffic information 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Jog controller to the left, if applicable. 4. Select the symbol: "Traffic information" Traffic information on the planned route is displayed first. Traffic information is arranged in order of distance from the vehicle's current position. 5. Select traffic information. Additional information can be displayed for some types of traffic information: 1. Select the

2. "Map" 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Settings" 5. "Traffic situation/grey map"

Symbols in the map view Symbols for traffic congestion are displayed depending on the scale of the map and the location of the congestion in relation to the route.

Additional information in the map view Length, direction and effect of a traffic congestion are displayed with road signs or bars along the calculated route, depending on the scale. The colours depend on the information transmitted by the traffic warning services. > Red: congestion > Orange: stop-and-go traffic > Yellow: heavy traffic > Green: clear road > Grey: general traffic information, e.g. roadworks

Filtering traffic information


1. "Navigation"

Navigation

You can obtain a display of traffic information from radio stations that broadcast a TMC (Traffic Message Channel). This traffic information is constantly updated with the aid of measurements from traffic control centres and indications from congestion detectors. During route guidance, the traffic information applicable to the route appears automatically and it is taken into in the route planning. You can also call up all traffic information manually via iDrive.

If the traffic information map is active, the Control Display is set to grey scales. This enables an optimum representation of traffic information. Day/night mode is not taken into in this setting. Symbols of points of interest are no longer displayed.

Entertainment

Traffic information*

Traffic information in the map

Communication

2. Turn the controller.

You can filter which traffic information the system is to display: 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Traffic info categories"

symbol.

2. Further information is displayed. 133 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Mobility

1. Jog the controller to the right until the split screen is selected.

3. To exit the menu: Jog the controller to the left.

Reference

Changing the scale

Route guidance

5. Select the desired category.

"Dynamic guidance" is activated for current route guidance.

Dynamic route guidance

The traffic information of the selected category is displayed.

If you select "Dynamic guidance", the route is automatically changed in the event of traffic congestion. The system does not notify on any traffic congestion on the original route. The newly calculated route may lead through the traffic congestion, depending on the road type and the type and length of the traffic congestion.

> Traffic information regarding the route itself cannot be hidden.

Country information using BMW Online*

> For your own personal safety, traffic information that indicates potential danger, e.g. oncoming drivers on the wrong side of the road, cannot be hidden.

BMW Online can transfer specific information on countries, see page 183, e.g. speed limits on A-roads.

Traffic information during route guidance

1. "Navigation" 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Country info (BMW Online)"

The system reacts differently, depending on whether "Dynamic guidance", see page 130, was selected or not. Traffic congestion on the way is taken into during route guidance. Particular hazards, e.g. oncoming drivers on the wrong road side, are displayed irrespective of the setting.

Display traffic congestion If traffic congestion is reported to the navigation system and "Dynamic guidance" has not been selected, you will receive certain information as from a distance of approx. 50 km or 30 miles, e.g. length of the congestion. The last chance to leave the route is indicated shortly beforehand. This information is still displayed if you have called up another application on the Control Display.

Selecting detour Select the

symbol: "Detour".


Overview

What to do if ... What to do if ...

Controls

> The current position cannot be displayed? The vehicle is in an area not covered by the data, is in a poor-reception area or the system is currently calculating the position. Reception will normally be possible outdoors.

Driving hints

> A destination without a street is not transferred to the route guidance system? No city centre can be determined for the place entered. Enter any street in the place selected and start route guidance.

Navigation

> A destination is not transferred to the route guidance system? The data for the destination are not available in the navigation data. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one.

Entertainment

> Letters for a destination cannot be selected for destination input? Saved data does not contain data of the destination. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one.

Communication

> The map view is not displayed in greyscales? If the traffic information map is active, the Control Display is set to grey scales. This enables an optimum representation of traffic information.


Reference

Mobility

> Spoken instructions cease to be given immediately before junctions during route guidance? Area not fully recorded, or you have deviated from the proposed route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new route.


Entertainment This chapter tells you how to operate the radio, CD, TV and external audio devices and how to adjust the tone settings for these systems.


On/off and settings

On/off and settings The following audio and video sources share the same controls and adjustment features: > Radio > CD/DVD* player > CD changer*

4

Station/track search > Changing radio stations > Selecting a track for the CD/DVD* player, CD changer* and certain multimedia devices

> Video* > External devices, e.g. MP3 player

Switching on/off

Controls

To switch audio output for entertainment systems on/off: Press the button 1 next to the CD/DVD player.

The audio and video sources can be operated via: > Buttons on the CD/DVD*player > iDrive > Buttons on the steering wheel, see page 10 > Favourites buttons, see page 19 > Voice control system

Buttons on the CD/DVD* player

This symbol on the Control Display indicates that audio output has been switched off. Sound output remains available for approx. 20 minutes after the ignition has been switched off. All you have to do is switch audio output back on.

Adjusting the volume Turn knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player until the desired volume is obtained. You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, see page 10.

Tone settings 1

Audio output for entertainment systems on/ off, volume > Press: switch on/off The track or radio station last set will be played upon switching it on. > Turn: adjusting the volume

2 3

Eject CD/DVD Drive for CD/DVD

You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass or the speed-dependent volume increase. The tone settings are applied to all audio sources. The settings are saved for the remote control currently in use.

Treble, bass, balance, fader > "Balance": volume balance, right/left > "Fader": volume balance, front/rear


Multichannel playback, surround*

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

You can choose between stereo and multichannel playback, surround sound.

2. "Tone"

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

Overview

Adjusting

2. "Tone"

LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are ed trademarks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the Harman International Group. 4. Adjusting: turn the controller. 5. Memorising: press controller.

Volumes

Equaliser*

> "Speed volume": adaptation of the volume depending on the speed

You can adjust individual audio frequency ranges. 1. "Radio", "CD/Multimedia" or "Settings". 2. "Tone" 3. "Equaliser" 4. Select the desired setting.

> "PDC"*: volume of the PDC sound signal in relation to the sound output from the entertainment system > "Gong": volume of the sound signal, e.g. for seatbelt reminder, in relation to the sound output from the entertainment system

Adjusting 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

Navigation

Surround is automatically activated or deactivated depending on the audio track selected.

Entertainment

When playing an audio track in stereo, multichannel playback - surround - is simulated.

Communication

3. Select the desired tone setting.

Driving hints

Controls

3. "L7 Surround"

2. "Tone"

5. Adjusting: turn the controller. 6. Memorising: press controller. 139 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

3. "Volume settings"

On/off and settings

4. Select the desired volume setting.

5. Adjusting: turn the controller. 6. Memorising: press controller.

Resetting the tone settings You can reset all tone settings to the default setting. 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings". 2. "Tone" 3. "Reset"


> AM: stations in the MW and SW wavebands* > DAB: digitally transmitted stations*, see page 145

Selecting station

Changing stations Turn and press the controller or Press the button for the corresponding direction or Press the buttons on the steering wheel, see page 10.

Selecting stations manually

Controls

> FM: stations in the VHF waveband

The selected radio station is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Driving hints

Your radio is designed to receive the following stations:

Overview

Radio

Selecting a station using the frequency.

Press the knob if audio output is switched off. 1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Select the desired station.

4. In the "AM" waveband, choose as applicable between "MW" or "SW"*. 5. Select frequency: turn the controller.

To memorise a station: press and hold the controller.

Entertainment

3. "Manual search"

Communication

2. "FM" or "AM"

Navigation

1. "Radio"

Mobility

Memorising stations Via iDrive 1. "Radio"


Reference

2. "FM" or "AM"

Radio

3. Select the desired station.

4. "RDS"

4. Press and hold the controller.


5. Select the desired memory location. The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Via favourites buttons

Regional programmes*

You can also store a station on the favourites buttons, see page 19.

Certain FM stations broadcast regional programmes at certain times of day. The following settings are possible:

1. Select the station.

> REG function on:

2.

... longer.

Press the desired button for

Radio Data System RDS* Additional information is transmitted using RDS in the FM wave length. RDS stations therefore offer the following features: > Where a radio station is broadcast on several frequencies, the set automatically switches to whichever frequency offers the best reception. > Where reception conditions are good, the names of stations are displayed on the Control Display. Where reception is poor or in the event of interference, it may take some time before the station names will appear in the display.

Switching RDS on/off

Recommended setting. The set regional programme is retained for as long as possible. Reception quality may deteriorate when you go beyond its transmission area. With poor reception quality over a longer period of time, a switch is made to a regional programme with better reception. > REG function off: When you leave the transmission area for the regional station that is tuned, the radio changes over to a new regional station if available. When in an area with two or more regional stations, the radio may switch to and fro between the stations. If this happens, switch on the REG function.

Switching REG function on/off 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" 3. Call up "Options".

1. "Radio" 2. "FM" 3. Call up "Options".


You can also store the TP function on the favourites buttons, see page 19.

Interrupt the traffic report

Overview

4. "REG"

Turn the volume knob during the traffic report until you have set the desired volume. This volume is retained for subsequent traffic reports. If other audio or video sources are set louder than the traffic reports, the volume of a report is increased correspondingly.

Traffic Programme, TP*

> "TP": Traffic Programme is switched on. > No display: Traffic Programme is not switched on.

Calling up a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Saved stations" 3. Select the desired station.

Memorising stations

Switching the Traffic Programme on/ off

The currently selected station is stored.

1. "Radio"

2. "Saved stations"

2. "FM"

3. "Save station"

Communication

1. "Radio"

3. Call up "Options". 4. "TP"

4. Select the desired memory location. The traffic report station with the strongest reception is chosen.

Navigation

Display in the status bar:

40 stations can be stored.

Entertainment

The navigation system's voice messages are not interrupted by traffic reports.

Memorised stations

The list of stored stations is stored for the remote control currently in use. You can also store a station on the favourites buttons, see page 19.


Mobility

You can receive traffic reports while listening to a CD. For this, the TP function, Traffic Programme, must be switched on.

Reference


Driving hints

Adjusting the volume for traffic reports*

Controls

Press the button during the traffic report.

Radio

Deleting a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Saved stations" 3. Select the desired station. 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Delete entry"


Several stations are combined to form an ensemble. Up to 15 stations are broadcast within an ensemble. Each station can transmit additional information such as weather reports, for example, or the name of the artist performing the current music track.

Navigation


Station scan* The list of stations that can be received is not automatically updated without the Professional navigation system. Press to manually start the station scan.

Changing stations Press the button.

1. "Radio" 2. "DAB" 3. If applicable, select "All ensembles". 4. "Station search"

Cancel station scan

Changing the ensemble You can change the ensemble only if you select "All ensembles". Press the button for longer.

Call up any stored station with: > Favourites buttons > "Saved stations"

Memorising stations

Entertainment

Some stations feature additional programmes; e.g. sports stations can broadcast various sports events simultaneously. In such cases you have the option of choosing a particular sports event.

Driving hints

Controls

3. If applicable, select "All ensembles" or the desired ensemble.

Communication

Digital radio provides you with additional stations that are transmitted with a high sound quality. A digital radio network must be available in order to receive digital stations.

Overview

Digital radio DAB*

1. "Radio" 2. "DAB"

1. "Radio" 2. "DAB"


Reference

Mobility

Selecting station

Digital radio DAB


Automatic DAB/FM switchover* The station is automatically changed if it is no longer available and DAB/FM switchover is activated. The station is searched for in another ensemble or the system searched for the analogue frequency.

4. Press the controller again. 5. Select the desired memory location. The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use. You can also store a station on the favourites buttons, see page 19.

Automatic switchover is only possible if the respective station is available in sufficient quality and if the identification of the stations matches.

Switching on automatic DAB/FM switchover 1. "Radio" 2. "DAB"

Displaying additional information

3. Call up "Options". 4. "Autom. DAB/FM changeover"

If offered by a particular station, additional information can be displayed, such as weather reports or the name of the artist performing the current music track. 1. "Radio" 2. "DAB" 3. Select the desired station. 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Station information"

This symbol beside the station name indicates that the analogue version of a digital station is being played. Symbol next to the name of the station indicates that a digital station in another ensemble that can be played in digital quality. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Additional programmes This symbol is shown if a selected station offers additional programmes. Sports stations, for example, may broadcast various sports events at the same time. You then have the option of choosing a particular sports event. 146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Overview

1. "Radio" 2. "DAB" 3. Select the desired station. 4. Press controller.


Reference

Mobility

Communication

Entertainment

Navigation

Driving hints

Controls

5. Select the additional programme.

CD/DVD player and CD changer

CD/DVD* player and CD changer* CD/DVD playback

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

Insert CD/DVD Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the label facing up. The CD/DVD is automatically retracted. The CD starts to play automatically if audio output is switched on. When playing CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, it can take the CD player a few minutes to read in the data, depending on the directory structure.

3. Selecting the desired CD or DVD:

Formats that can be played CD/DVD* player

Eject CD/DVD

> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVDRW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD-Audio (only video system), DVDVideo > CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, VCD, SVCD > Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC

Press the button next to the CD/DVD player. The CD/DVD is partly ejected from the drive. Symbol

Function CD/DVD player CD changer

CD player/CD changer* > CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA

Playing audio tracks

Starting play

Selecting track with the button

Via iDrive Fill and insert the CD/DVD magazine, see page 152.

Press the button for the appropriate direction repeatedly until the desired track is reached.

To start to play a CD if there is already a CD in the player or changer:


5. Select a track and press the controller.

Audio CDs 1. "CD/Multimedia"

Overview

Selecting a track using iDrive

2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD. Controls

4. Select the desired track to start playback.

If information is stored for a track, this is displayed automatically:

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD. 4. Select the directory as appropriate. To change to a higher-level directory: jog the controller to the left.

> Artist > Album title > Number of tracks on the CD/DVD > File name of the track

Random playback The tracks on the current CD/DVD are played in random order once. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD.


Reference

Mobility


Communication

Depending on the data, not all characters of the CD/DVD are displayed correctly.

Entertainment

Navigation

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files*

Driving hints

Displaying information on the track*


Starting play

5. "Random"

For your own safety, video is displayed only up to a speed of approx. 3 km/h or approx. 2 mph and in some national market versions it is displayed only when the handbrake is applied or the selector lever is in position P.

DVD video 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: the folders and the tracks they contain are played in random order.

3. Select a DVD with video content. 4.

"DVD menu"

Random playback is switched off when the audio source is changed or the ignition is switched off.

Fast forward/rewind Press and hold the button for the appropriate direction.

Automatic repeat function* Selected tracks, directories or CDs/DVDs are repeated automatically.

5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.

VCD/SVCD 1. "CD/Multimedia"

Video playback*

2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select a CD/DVD with video content.

Country codes Only DVDs with the code of your home region can be played, see also the information on your DVD.

4.

"Select track"

5. Select the desired track. The CD/DVD is started.

Code

Region

Video menu

1

USA, Canada

To open the Video menu:

2

Japan, Europe, Near East, South Africa

1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing.

3

South-East Asia

4

Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand

5

North-West Asia, North Africa

6

China

0

All regions

2. Press the controller when "Back" is displayed. The Video menu is displayed: Symbol

Function Calls up the DVD menu* Starting play Pause


Subtitles*

Stop

Subtitles can be selected if the DVD includes this feature.

Next chapter/next track


Previous chapter/previous track


Driving hints

With fast forward/rewind: each time the controller is pressed, the speed increases. To stop, start playback.

DVD menu 1. If necessary, turn the controller to call up the Video menu. 2.

"DVD menu" The DVD menu is displayed. The display depends on the contents of the DVD.

Brightness, contrast, colour

> To select menu items: jog and press the controller.


> To change to the Video menu: turn the controller and select "Back".

3. "Display settings"

2. Call up "Options". 4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Colour"

Settings for DVD/VCD For some DVDs, settings are only possible via the DVD menu, see also information on your DVD.

Language* 1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing. 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Audio/language"

Controls

4. Select the desired language or "Do not display subtitles".

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting has been reached, then press the controller.

Navigation

Rewind

3. "Subtitles"

Entertainment

Fast forward

Overview

Function

Communication

Symbol

Zoom

2. Call up "Options". 3. "Other options" 4. Select the desired language. The languages available depend on the DVD. 151 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Reference


Mobility

Display video picture over full screen.


4. "Zoom mode"

CD changer*

Selecting a track

The BMW CD changer for six CDs is located on the left of the luggage compartment under a cover in the side trim.

DVD video: 1. With the DVD menu displayed, turn the controller. 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Other options" 4. "Select title"

Taking out the CD magazine To load or empty it, take the CD magazine out of the CD changer:

5. Select the desired track. VCD/SVCD: 1.

"Select track"

2. Select the desired track.

Camera angles* The camera angles depend on the DVD. 1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing. 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Other options" 4. "Viewing angle" 5. Select the desired angle of view.

1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1. 2. Press the button, arrow 2. The CD magazine is ejected. Wait at least 2 seconds before pushing the magazine back in so that the machine can read in the inserted CDs again.

Calling up the main menu, Back These functions are not included on every DVD. It might be that these functions cannot be run.


A high level of humidity may cause the laser beam focusing lens to fog over and temporarily prevent the CD/DVD from being played.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs Should malfunctions occur only with individual CDs/DVDs, one of the following factors may be the cause:

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs Push the CD magazine all the way in, arrow 1, and close the cover, arrow 2. The CD changer automatically reads in the contained CDs and is then operational.


Humidity

With self-recorded CDs/DVDs, possible causes for output malfunctions are, e.g., an inconsistent data creation or burning process, or low quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank. Only label CDs/DVDs on the top with a pen designed for this purpose.

Notes

Damage

BMW CD/DVD players and changers are class 1 laser products. Never use them if the cover is damaged, otherwise there is a risk of serious eye injuries. Do not use CDs/DVDs with adhesive labels that have been affixed subsequently, as these may peel off while in the drive as a result of the temperatures to which CDs are exposed during playing, and could damage the system irrepara-

Avoid fingerprints, as well as dust, scratches and moisture. Store CDs/DVDs in a protective cover. Do not expose CDs/DVDs to temperatures above 506/1227, high levels of humidity or direct sunlight.

Navigation

Inserting the CD magazine

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it has been inserted properly.

Entertainment

To empty: Pull out the required slot and remove the CD.

BMW CD/DVD players and changers have been optimised for operation in vehicles. In some instances, they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

Communication

To load: Insert one CD into each slot with the label side uppermost.

General malfunctions

Mobility

When loading CDs into or removing them from the CD magazine, hold them at the edge and do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.

bly. Use only round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 12 cm, and do not use CDs/DVDs in conjunction with adapters, e.g. CD singles, otherwise the CDs or the adapter could jam and be impossible to eject. Do not use combined CD/DVDs, e.g. DVDPlus, otherwise the CD/DVD could jam and be impossible to eject.<

CDs/DVDs with copy protection CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the manufacturer. This could result in CDs/DVDs 153


Reference

Loading/emptying the CD magazine


being impossible to play, or only playable with restrictions.

MACROVISION This product contains copyrighted technology based on a number of ed U.S. patents and intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers. The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision. Media with the corresponding protection – unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision – may only be shown privately. It is prohibited to copy this technology.

DTS Digital SurroundTM Manufactured under licence of US patent numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 and other patents issued and applied for in the USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are ed trademarks and DTS Digital Surround and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. © DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.


1. Insert a CD/DVD in the CD/DVD player.

5. "Save in car"

Back up music data regularly, as otherwise it could be lost in the event of a fault in the hard disk.< Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote® is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com. CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

symbol for the CD/DVD

Driving hints

4. Select the player.

The music collection is displayed. The tracks are memorised and played in sequence from the music collection. During memorising, bear the following in mind: Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player, as otherwise memorising is interrupted. It is possible to change over to the other audio sources without interrupting memorising. Tracks of the current CD/DVD that have already been memorised can also be called up.

Interrupting memorising 1. "CD/Multimedia"

Navigation

> CD/DVD or USB medium with compressed audio files: the entire content of the CD/ DVD or USB medium is stored as an album in the vehicle. After memorising, tracks and directories can be deleted individually. Only the formats WMA, MP3 and AAC are stored. Tracks with copy protection, DRM, are stored in the vehicle, but cannot be played.

3. "CD/DVD"

Entertainment

2. "CD/Multimedia"

Communication

> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a compressed audio format on storage. If applicable, information on the album, e.g. the artist, is stored.

Controls

It is only possible to memorise CDs / DVDs from the CD/DVD player.

2. "CD/DVD" Mobility

Tracks from CDs and DVDs and USB media can be stored in the music collection in the vehicle and played from there.

Save from CDs/DVDs*

Gracenote and CDDB are ed trademarks by Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote" logo are trademarks of Gracenote.


Reference

Music memory

Overview

Music collection*

Music collection

3. "Saving..."

It is only possible to memorise tracks from a USB medium via the USB interface in the glove box.< 1. Connect the USB medium to the USB interface in the glove box. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "Music collection" 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Music data import/export"

4. "Cancel saving"

6. "Import music (USB)"

The memorising process is interrupted and can be continued at any time.

Resuming memorising 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the player.

symbol for the CD/DVD

4. "Continue saving" Memorising the CD is continued at the start of the track at which memorising was interrupted.

Information on the album During the memorising process, the information, e.g. the name of the artist, is stored for the tracks if this information is available in the database in the vehicle or on the CD. Please your Service for updating your database. If no information is stored for the tracks, you can update the entire album information via BMW Online*, see page 158.

Music, playing Music search All tracks for which information is stored can be called up via music search. All tracks for which no information is stored can be called up via the corresponding album. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Music search"

Memorising from a USB medium To save music, a suitable medium must be connected to the USB interface in the glove box. > Suitable media: USB mass storage facilities, e.g. USB memory sticks or MP3 players with USB interface. > Unsuitable media: USB hard disks, USB hubs, USB memory card readers with a number of bays, Apple iPod/iPhone.


Currently playing The last list of tracks generated by the music search or the last album selected.

Controls

1. "Current playback"

Overview

4. Select the desired category.

> Call up "A-Z search" and enter the desired entry. 2. If applicable, select the desired track.

7. "Start playback"

Starting new music search "New search"

Music search using voice input* Instructions on the voice input system, see page 21. 1. Press the


2. {Music search} 3. Call up the desired category, e.g. {Select artist}. 4. Say the desired entry on the list.

Top 50 List of the 50 most frequently played tracks. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Top 50" 4. If applicable, select the desired track.

Albums All memorised albums, listed in the order of their date of memorising. Symbols indicate the format. Symbol

Format Audio CD Compressed audio files

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Select the desired album.

Navigation

6. Select further categories as appropriate. The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order. Not all categories need to be selected. If, for example, you wish to find all the tracks of a certain artist, call up only this artist. All tracks by that artist will be displayed.

Entertainment

> Select the desired entry from the list.

Communication

or

Driving hints

5. Select the desired entry:

5. Select further categories as appropriate. {Title …} Say the voice command and the name of the desired track in one sentence.


Reference

Mobility

Directly selecting tracks:

Music collection

Depending on the album, the tracks or subdirectories of the album are displayed. The first track might be played automatically.

5. "Rename album"

4. To select a track, change directories if necessary. Jog the controller to the left to switch to a higher-level directory.

Random playback All the tracks in the selection are played in random order. 1. "CD/Multimedia"

6. Select the letters individually.

2. "Music collection" 3. Call up "Options".

Deleting album

4. "Random"

It may not be possible to delete an album while a track from that album is being played. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Delete album"

Deleting directory and track

Music, managing Albums

It may not be possible to delete a track while it is being played, Or to delete a directory while a track from that directory is being played. 1. "CD/Multimedia"

Renaming album

2. "Music collection"

If applicable, the name of the album is entered automatically during memorising. If the name is unknown, it can be changed later.


If a track from the album is currently being played, the album cannot be renamed. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Call up "Options".

3. Highlight the directory or track. 5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track".

Album information* If no information was stored for audio CDs on memorising, it can be updated later via BMW Online* as required. The update takes place for each individual album.

Updating album information via BMW Online* 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

6. "Music data import/export"


Controls

5. "Update album info online"

Overview

3. Highlight the desired album.

Driving hints

7. "Backup music on USB" If memorising of the album information was possible, the name of the album is displayed.

Free capacity Display free capacity in the music collection.

Music collection Backing up music collection

Restoring a music collection in the vehicle When music is memorised from a USB medium, the existing music collection in the vehicle is replaced.<

The entire music collection can be backed up on a USB medium. Ensure that the USB medium has adequate free capacity.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

Depending on the number of tracks, backing up the music collection can take several hours. This is why it is best to make the backup during a longer journey.

4. "Music data import/export"

2. Connect the USB medium to the USB interface in the glove box, see page 98. 3. "CD/Multimedia" 4. "Music collection"

3. Call up "Options". 5. "Restore music from USB"

Deleting music collection 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Delete music collection"

Mobility

1. Start the engine.


Entertainment

4. "Memory available"



Reference


Communication


Navigation

1. "CD/Multimedia"

External devices

External devices Overview Symbol

Adjusting the volume Meaning AUX-IN port USB audio interface*/audio interface, mobile phone*

The volume of the sound output depends on the audio device. If this volume deviates strongly from other audio sources, it makes sense to balance the volumes. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. If applicable "External devices" 3.

AUX-IN port

"AUX front"

4. "Volume"

You can connect an external audio device, for instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks over the vehicle's loudspeaker system. You can adjust the tone using iDrive.

Connecting

5. Turn the controller until the desired volume setting is reached and press the controller.

Connection for audio playback: Jack plug 3.5 mm To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loudspeaker system, connect the headset or lineout port of the external device to the AUX-IN port.

Starting audio playback Connect the audio device, switch it on and select a track. Operation takes place at the audio device.

Via iDrive 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. If applicable "External devices" 3.

"AUX front"

USB audio interface*/ extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone* Connection of external audio devices / mobile phones is possible. Operation takes place via iDrive. The sound is output via the vehicle loudspeakers.

Connection options for external devices > Connection via USB audio interface: Apple iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g. MP3 player, USB memory sticks or mobile phones that are ed by the USB audio interface. > Connection using the snap-in adapter*, see page 177, if your vehicle is equipped with extended connectivity of the music player to the mobile phone: Apple iPhone/mobile


During transfer, the tracks can be called up via the file directory.

Audio files

The information from up to four USB devices can be stored in the vehicle, for a total of approx. 16,000 tracks.

The common audio files, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM) and AAC as well as playlists in the M3U format can be played.

If a fifth device is connected or if more than 16,000 tracks are stored, the information of existing tracks is deleted.

Connecting via USB audio interface

Tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management (DRM) cannot be played.<

Overview Controls

The large number of audio devices/mobile phones available on the market means it cannot be ensured that every audio device/mobile phone can be operated with the vehicle. Ask your BMW Service which audio devices/ mobile phones are suitable.

After you connect for the first time, the information on all tracks (e.g. artist, music genre) as well as the playlists of the USB device are transferred to the vehicle. This operation can take some time. How long it takes depends on the USB device and the number of tracks.

Driving hints

phones. Playback is only possible if no audio device/mobile phone is connected to the USB audio interface.

AUX-IN port for audio playback: Jack plug 3.5 mm

2

USB interface

Apple iPod/iPhone Use the special cable adapter to connect an Apple iPod/iPhone, which is available from Service. The cable adapter is required for a proper connection. Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone via cable adapter for Apple iPod/iPhone with AUX-IN port 1 and USB interface 2. The menu structure of the Apple iPod/iPhone is ed by the USB audio interface.

USB device

Playback starts with the first track. When an Apple iPhone is connected via the snap-in adapter and an audio device is simultaneously connected to the AUX-IN port, the audio signal of the AUX-IN port is played.

Connect using a flexible adapter cable. This protects the USB interface and your USB device against mechanical damage.<

Information on the track

Use a flexible adapter cable to connect the USB device to connection 2.

> Artist

If information is stored for a track, this is displayed automatically: > Album title 161


Entertainment

1

3. Select the symbol. The name of the audio device might be displayed.

Communication

2. "External devices"

Mobility

1. "CD/Multimedia"

Reference

If the audio device has a device name, this is displayed.

Navigation

Starting audio playback

External devices

> Number of tracks > File name of the track

this artist. All tracks by that artist will be displayed. 6. "Start playback"

Searching for tracks Selection options via:

Starting a new track search

> Playlists

"New search"

> Information: music genre, artist, album, titles

Playlists

> Additionally in the case of USB devices: file directory, composer

1. "CD/Multimedia"

Tracks are displayed if their titles have been stored in Latin letters.

Starting the track search

Calling up playlists. 2. "External devices" 3. Select the

symbol.

4. "Playlists"

1. "CD/Multimedia"

Currently playing

2. "External devices"

List of currently played tracks.

3. Select the symbol. The name of the audio device might be displayed.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

4. Select the desired category, "Genre", "Artist".

2. "External devices" 3. Select the

symbol.

4. "Current playback"

Random playback You can play the tracks of the selected list in random order, e.g. all tracks of one artist. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Random" All entries are shown in a list. You can use "A-Z search" to find certain entries. > Call up "A-Z search" and enter the desired entry. When you enter a character, a filter is run on the basis of this character as the first letter. When you enter several characters, all the results that contain this character string are displayed. > Select the desired entry from the list. 5. Select further categories as appropriate. Not all categories need to be selected. If, for example, all the tracks of a certain artist are to be displayed, it is sufficient to call up only

Fast forward/rewind Press and hold the button for the appropriate direction.

Notes Do not expose the audio device to extreme environmental conditions, e.g. very high temperatures, see operating instructions of the audio device. Otherwise, the audio device can be damaged, thus reducing driving safety while the vehicle is being driven.< Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s, perfect playback cannot be ensured in every case.


Overview

Information regarding connection > The connected audio device is supplied with a maximum power of 500 mA if the device s this. For this reason, do not connect the device to a socket in the vehicle.

Controls

> Do not force the connector into the USB interface. > Do not connect any devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface. > Do not connect USB hard disks.


Reference

Mobility

Communication

Entertainment

Navigation

Driving hints

> Do not use the USB audio interface to charge external devices.


Communication This chapter summarises how to make telephone calls and how to use BMW Assist and BMW TeleServices.


Telephone

Telephone* The principle

Suitable mobile phones

Your BMW is equipped with a mobile phone provision. As soon as you have performed a once-only logging-on procedure in the vehicle with a suitable mobile phone, you will also be able to operate it via iDrive, the buttons on the steering wheel and the voice control*.

Ask BMW Service for details of which mobile phones with a Bluetooth interface are ed by the mobile phone provision and for which mobile phones there are snap-in adapters available. These mobile phones, in conjunction with a specific software status, the functions described in these Operating Instructions. Other types of mobile phone could malfunction.

A mobile phone that has previously been logged on is automatically identified again as soon as it is brought inside the vehicle if the engine is running or the ignition switched on. The log-on data of up to four mobile phones can be retained at any one time. If more than one mobile phone is identified at the same time, whichever mobile phone was logged on most recently can be operated via the vehicle.

Operating options You can operate the mobile phone via: > Buttons on the steering wheel, see page 10 > iDrive, see page 16

Phoning from inside the vehicle Use of the snap-in adapter* The snap-in adapter, a type of mobile phone holder, enables you to recharge the battery and connect the mobile phone to the external aerial of your vehicle. This will assure better network reception and consistent sound quality. BMW Service knows for which mobile phones there are snap-in adapters available.

For your safety A car phone provides many services, and can even save lives. You will find safety instructions in the separate operating instructions of your mobile phone, but please comply with the following additional instructions: Only make inputs when it is safe to do so without risk to yourself or other road s. Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while driving; use the hands-free unit instead. You could otherwise be distracted and put both the occupants of your vehicle and other road s at risk.<

> Voice control*, see page 174 > Favourites buttons, see page 19 Avoid operating a mobile phone that has been identified by the vehicle via the phone's keypad, otherwise it could malfunction.

Initial operation Logging mobile phone on in the vehicle The following conditions must be met: > Suitable mobile phone: the mobile phone is ed by the mobile phone provision. You will find information on the Internet at: www.bmw.com/bluetooth > The mobile phone must be operational. > The Bluetooth on the vehicle, see page 168, and on the mobile phone must have been activated.


> Reconnect > Depending on the mobile phone type, setting the power economy mode, for instance, may result in a logged-on mobile phone not being identified by the vehicle. > To log on, choose any 4-16-digit number as the Bluetooth key, e.g. 25081107. A number that is as long and complex as possible provides greater protection against unauthorised access. This Bluetooth key is no longer required once you have successfully logged on. > The ignition must be switched on. Only log on the mobile phone while the vehicle is at a standstill so as not to endanger the vehicle's occupants and other road s as a result of being distracted.<

Switch on ignition

7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.

Logging in Depending on the type of mobile phone; you are successively requested first by the display on the mobile phone or the iDrive to enter the same Bluetooth key that you defined. 8. Enter the Bluetooth key. Depending on the type of mobile phone, you will have around 30 seconds to enter the Bluetooth key on the mobile phone and on the Control Display.

1. Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition switch. 2. Switch on the ignition and, in addition, press the start/stop button without operating the brake or clutch pedal.

Preparation via iDrive 3. "Telephone" 4. "Bluetooth (telephone)" 5. "Add new device"

If log-on was successful, the mobile phone appears in the first position in the list of mobile phones.

Overview

6. Further procedures must be performed on the mobile phone; these may vary depending on the type of mobile phone, see the operating instructions for your mobile phone, e.g. under locating, connecting up or pairing Bluetooth device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown on the display of the mobile phone.

Controls

> Allow connection without further prompt

Driving hints

Preparation via the mobile phone

Navigation

> Bluetooth activated

Entertainment

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is displayed.

Communication

> Depending on the mobile phone, initial adjustments have to be made on the mobile phone, e.g. via the following menu items:

> As soon as a mobile phone is identified by the vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the SIM card or in your mobile phone are transferred to your vehicle. Transferring this 167 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Reference

> Mobile phone is detected/paired in the vehicle after a short delay when the engine is running or the ignition switched on.

Mobility

After initial registration

Telephone

data depends on the type of mobile phone, see operating instructions for your mobile phone if appropriate. Transferring the entries may take several minutes. > Four mobile phones can be ed. > Some mobile phones may require certain settings, authorisation or secure connection, see operating instructions of the mobile phone.

is connected. If another mobile phone is to be connected, this can be selected. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (telephone)" 3. Select the desired mobile phone.

If not all of the telephone book entries are displayed: > If necessary, transfer all telephone book entries from the SIM card to the mobile phone. > Telephone book entries with special characters may sometimes not be displayed.

Logging mobile phone off in the vehicle 1. "Telephone"

If log-on is not successful, check the following > Is the mobile phone ed by the mobile phone provision? You will find information on the Internet at: www.bmw.com/ bluetooth.

2. "Bluetooth (telephone)" 3. Highlight the mobile phone to be logged off. 4. Call up "Options". 5. "Remove device from list"

> Do the Bluetooth keys on the mobile phone and vehicle agree? The same Bluetooth key must be entered on the display of the mobile phone and via iDrive. > Did you need longer than 30 seconds to enter the Bluetooth key? Then repeat the log-on procedure. > Too many Bluetooth devices paired to the mobile phone? If applicable, delete connection with other devices. > Does the mobile phone no longer respond? Switch the mobile phone off and on again or disconnect the power supply. > Repeat registration. > If all the points in the list have been checked and you are still unable to connect the mobile phone, the hotline.

Connecting a certain mobile phone If more than one mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the mobile phone furthest up the list

The logged-off mobile phone is deleted from the list. The telephone book entries and the list of stored phone numbers are also deleted.

Deactivating/activating Bluetooth connection Bluetooth technology is not permitted in all countries. Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are travelling. Temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth connection between the vehicle and the mobile phone if necessary. If the Bluetooth connection is deactivated, you are no longer able to operate the mobile phone


Voice quality Loud background noises may cause the person with whom you are telephoning to have difficulties in understanding you. The mobile phone provision is able to compensate for these noises to a certain extent. To optimise voice quality during a call, we recommend that you:

Volume adjustment

> Reduce background noise, e.g. by closing windows, reducing the air volume from the automatic air conditioning or angling the open front air vents downwards. > Reduce the volume of the hands-free unit.

Conditions > The mobile phone's log-on data have been stored by the vehicle and the mobile phone is on standby. Turn the knob until the desired volume is reached. Adjust volume: > Ringing tone volume

> The engine is running or the ignition is switched on. > The mobile phone is identified by the vehicle.

> Call volume

Receiving a call

These volume settings are retained for the hands-free system even if you set other audio sources to minimum values.

If the number of the person calling you is stored in the phone book and the number is not withheld, the name under which it is stored is displayed.


Accepting a call Press the

Operation via iDrive


or

You can operate the following functions via iDrive: 169 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Overview Driving hints

With the ignition switched off but in the radio ready state, e.g. after the remote control has been removed, you can continue a call via the hands-free unit for a number of minutes.

Controls

> Ending a call

Navigation

3. "Bluetooth"

> Dialling stored numbers, e.g. from the list of received calls

Entertainment


> Dialling a number from the phone book

Communication

1. "Telephone"

> Dialling a phone number

Mobility

To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth connection between your vehicle and your mobile phone:

> Accepting/rejecting a call

Reference

via the vehicle but it will still be possible to use other devices with a Bluetooth interface via the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop.<

Telephone

"Accept"

4. Select the tion

Rejecting a call "Reject" The calling party is redirected to your voicemail if it was activated.

Ending a call Press the


or 1. "Telephone"

or Press the

symbol to set up the connec-


It is also possible to enter the phone number using voice input*, see page 174. For your phone number to be displayed to the person you are talking to, the caller display function must be enabled by your service provider.

2. "Active calls"

Calls with a number of participants

3. Select the active call.

It is possible to switch between calls and merge two calls to set up a conference. The functions must be ed by the mobile phone and service provider.

Accepting a call during another call This function depends on the service provider and might have to be enabled. The mobile phone might have to be configured for this service.

Dialling a number

If there is a second call during an ongoing call you hear a call waiting signal, if applicable.

1. "Telephone"

"Accept"

2. "Dial number"

The call is accepted and the existing call is held.

3. Select the digits individually.

Setting up a second call Set up another call during a call. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls"


1. "Telephone" 2. "Phone book" All s with telephone number are displayed. A symbol indicates the storage location of the s.

Overview

number is entered. The entries can be selected and a call set up.

Controls

3. "Hold"

The current call is held.

Storage location In the vehicle, address not checked as destination.

To switch to the held call, select this.

In the vehicle, address checked as destination.

Setting up a conference

Mobile phone

Two calls can be merged to set up a telephone conference. 1. Setting up two calls. 2. "Conference call"

BMW Online address book*

Calling a 1. Select the desired . In the case of s with a telephone number, a connection is established. In the case of s with a number of telephone numbers: 2. Select the desired phone number. The connection is established. Symbol

On termination, both calls are always terminated. If one call is terminated by another subscriber, the other call is continued, if required.

Phone book The telephone book accesses the s* and shows all the s where a telephone

Meaning

Entertainment

Symbol No symbol

with a telephone number. with more than one telephone number. Call not possible, mobile phone without reception or network or TeleService call* active. 171


Mobility

> Held call: indicated by a green telephone handset

Reference

> Active call: indicated by a red telephone handset

Communication

Switching between two calls, alternating

Navigation

Driving hints

4. Dial a new phone number or select from a list.

Telephone

Editing s Changing the entries. If a is changed, the changes are not saved on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is saved in the vehicle. 1. Highlight the .

6. "Save in car"

Incoming calls The last 20 incoming calls are displayed. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Received calls"

2. Call up "Options". 3. "Edit entry" The can be edited.

Redial The eight phone numbers last dialled are stored.

Dialling numbers via iDrive 1. "Telephone"

Dialling a number

2. "Last number redial"

Select the entry. The connection is established.

Deleting entries 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Saving an entry in 's' 3. Select the desired entry. The connection is established.

Deleting an individual entry or all entries

1. Highlight the entry. 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Save as new " or "Add to existing ".


4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Work", "Mobile" or "Others".


5. If necessary, complete the entries.

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

6. "Save "

Saving an entry in 's'

Messages


Various message types can be displayed:


4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Work", "Mobile" or "Others".

> SMS The display of texts depends on whether data transfer into the vehicle is ed by the mobile phone. It is possible that texts are not ed by the service provider or must be enabled separately.

5. If necessary, complete the entries.

> Messages from My Info

3. "Save as new " or "Add to existing ".


> Emails from BMW Online*

2.

Displaying messages

Message from information service

"Call"

1. "Telephone"

Incorporating an address into route guidance*:

2. "Messages"

1. Select the message.

A symbol indicates the type of message.

2.

Symbol

"Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

Storage location

Overview

1. Select the message that contains the desired number.

Controls

> Messages from BMW Assist information service

My Info Message from information service 3. Select the desired message.

Select the desired message.

2. Call up "Options". 3. "Call sender" Saving the sender in s: 1.


2. Call up "Options". 3. "Save as new " or "Add to existing ".

Dialling a phone number: 1. Select the message. 2.

"Call"

Saving an address:

Entertainment

1.

3. If necessary, start the route guidance.

1. Select the message. 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Save in car"

Deleting messages

My Info

1. Select the message to be deleted.

Replying:


Send a predefined reply.

3. "Delete message" or "Delete all messages"


2. Call up "Options". 3. "Answer" Starting route guidance:

Emails from BMW Online* Emails from the BMW Online portal can be displayed. For this purpose, log-on to BMW Online, see page 183.

1. Select the message that contains the desired destination.

1. "Telephone"

2.


"Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

Dialling the number in the message:

Mobility

1.

Communication

Calling the sender of a text message:

2. "Messages" 4. "E-mail (BMW Online)" If this text does not appear, log-on to BMW Online. 173


Reference

SMS

Navigation

Driving hints

SMS

Telephone

Switching between mobile phone and hands-free unit From the mobile phone to the handsfree unit* You can continue a call commenced outside the Bluetooth range of the vehicle via the handsfree unit if the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. Depending on the type of mobile phone, changeover to the hands-free mode may take place automatically. For mobile phones that do not change over automatically to hands-free operation: Some models of mobile phone allow you to continue the call via the hands-free unit. Proceed according to the instructions shown on the display of the mobile phone, see operating instructions of your mobile phone.

From the hands-free unit to the mobile phone If you are conducting a conversation via the hands-free unit, you may also be able to continue the call via the mobile phone depending on its type. Proceed according to the instructions shown on the display of the mobile phone, see operating instructions of your mobile phone. Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth connection, see page 168. Depending on the type of your mobile phone, if the mobile phone network reception conditions are poor, the conversation may be switched from the hands-free unit to the mobile phone.

Operation by voice control* The principle > You can operate your mobile phone without having to take your hands off the steering wheel.

Conditions The same conditions apply as for operation via iDrive, see page 169.

Speaking commands Activating voice control 1. Briefly press the button on the steering wheel. An acoustic signal indicates that you can say commands. 2. Say a command.

Terminating/cancelling operation via voice control Press the briefly or


{Cancel}. In dialogues not involving commands, i.e. when you are speaking text such as names, cancelling is possible only with the button on the steering wheel.

Having possible commands read aloud The system understands predefined commands which need to be given exactly, word for word. You can have the available commands read out to you at any point: {Help}. Digits from zero to nine are understood. You can say each digit individually or say the entire number as a block to speed up the input process.

Using alternative commands There are often several different commands available for performing the same function, e.g.: {Dial name} or {Name}.

> {...} Identifies commands for the voice control system.


Overview

An example: dialling a phone number To start the dialogue:

You say

The voice recognition answers

{Dial number}

{{Please say the number}}

E.g. {123 456 7890}

Depending on the equipment: {{123 456 7890. Continue?}}

{Dial}

The system dials the number shown.

You can repeat the {Correct number} command as often as you want, even deleting all the digits in this way if necessary.

Deleting a phone number {Delete}. Turn the knob during an announcement. This volume is retained for announcements even if you set other audio sources to minimum values. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Making a call Dialling a number 1. {Dial number}. 2. Say the phone number. When making an international call, say {Plus} and then the international dialling code. 3. {Dial}. The connection with the desired subscriber is established.

All previously entered digits are deleted.

Redial To redial the number last dialled: {Redial}.

Voice-activated phone book* Depending on the equipment available in your vehicle, it may be necessary to create a separate voice-activated phone book. The entries must be made using voice control and are independent of the memory of your mobile phone. Hence, in this case, phone numbers stored in your mobile phone cannot be called up via the voice control or stored there. Up to 50 entries can be set up. An entry always consists of a name and a phone number.

Creating and editing a voice-activated phone book To save the entry:


Driving hints Navigation

{Correct number}. The digits are deleted.

Entertainment

Once the system has repeated the last sequence of digits you gave, you can delete that sequence of digits.

Communication

You can adjust the volume for announcements of the system:

Correcting a number

Mobility

Adjusting the volume of announcements

Controls


Reference

Press the

Telephone

An entry always consists of a name and a phone number. 1. {Save name}.

Selecting an entry The connection to the phone number of the selected entry is established.

2. Say the name. The time it takes to say a name in the voice-activated phone book must not exceed about 2 seconds.

1. {Dial name}. The dialogue for dialling an entry is called up.

3. When prompted by the system, say the phone number.

3. Confirm request with {Yes}.

4. To save the phone number: {Save}. To delete the entry: You can delete any entry from the voice-activated phone book. 1. {Delete name}. The dialogue for deleting an entry is called up. 2. When asked to do so, say the name. 3. Confirm request with {Yes}. Deleting all entries: {Delete phonebook} deletes all the entries in the phone book. 1. {Delete phonebook}. The dialogue for deleting the phone book is called up. 2. Confirm request with {Yes}. 3. Confirm the repeated query with {Yes}. Reading out and dialling entries: You can have all entries in your voice-activated phone book read out in the sequence in which they were input and select a particular entry in order to establish a connection:

2. When asked to do so, say the name.

Notes Information for emergency calls Do not use the voice control system for emergency calls. In stress situations, the spoken language and voice pitch can change. This delays establishment of a telephone connection unnecessarily. Instead, use the emergency call button*, see page 216.

To note when using the voice control When using the voice control, note the following: > Say commands, digits and letters fluently and in a normal volume, intonation and speed. > Always say the commands in the language of the voice input system. > Keep doors, windows and panorama glass roof* closed to avoid noise interference from outside the vehicle. > Avoid causing background noise in the vehicle while you are speaking.

1. {Read phonebook}. The dialogue for reading out the phone book is called up. 2. {Dial number}, if the desired entry is being read aloud.


2. Push the mobile phone with the keys upwards towards the electrical connections and press down until it engages.

The battery of the mobile phones is charged as of the radio ready state or unlocked steering. So as not to deplete the batteries of the vehicle, telephone calls with the ignition switched off should be avoided.<

Entertainment

Removing the mobile phone

Navigation

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front and press down until it engages.

Driving hints

Controls

1. Press button 1 and take off the cover.

that the mobile phone can engage in the snap-in adapter.

Overview

Inserting/removing the snapin adapter*

Communication

To remove the snap-in adapter: Press button 1.

Press the button.

Inserting the mobile phone


Reference

Mobility

1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile phone's aerial connector if necessary so

s

s* You can create and edit s. s from the mobile phone* as well as from the BMW Online address book are also displayed if the mobile phone s this function*. The addresses can be used as navigation destinations and the phone numbers dialled directly.

Defining a as home address

New

List of all s from the vehicle, the mobile phone and the BMW Online address book*.

1. "s" 2. "New "

You can save a as your home address. It is the first entry in "My s". 1. "Home address" 2. Create .

My s

Displaying s 1. "s" 2. "My s"

3. If the input fields are still occupied with the previous entries, select "Clear fields" if applicable. 4. To complete the input fields: Select the symbol beside the input field.

All s are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of s, the A-Z search is offered. A symbol indicates the storage location of the s: Symbol

Storage location

No symbol

In the vehicle, address not checked as destination. In the vehicle, address checked as destination. Mobile Phone*

5. Enter text. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, only addresses that are present in the vehicle's navigation data can be entered. This ensures that route guidance is possible for all addresses.< 6. "Save in car"

BMW Online address book*

Showing detailed view* Select the desired . All completed fields of the are displayed.




3. "Check as destination"

4. "Show: surname, first name" or "Show: first name, surname"

4. If necessary, correct and save the address.

Depending on how s are displayed on your mobile phone, the display of names can differ from the selected display format.

If the address is corrected and saved, a copy is created in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone or at BMW Online*.

Display BMW Online* s

Dial the number*

When you log on to BMW Online, see page 183, you must activate the " automatically" function in order to view BMW Online s.

1. "My s"


Editing s 1. "My s" 2. Select the desired . 3. "Edit "

3. "Further info (BMW Online)"

Selecting a as navigation destination 1. "My s" 2. Select the desired . 3. Select the desired address. It is possible that the addresses of the mobile phone* and from the BMW Online address book* do not comply with the navigation data contained in the vehicle. This means that route guidance cannot be taken over. If that is the case: Correct the address manually.

Check the address as destination* It must be possible to match the address that is to be adopted into the route guidance to the navigation data contained in the vehicle. An address stored on the mobile phone or coming

Navigation

1. Select the desired .

The connection is established.

Entertainment

Display of additional information for a if present at BMW Online.

3. Select the desired phone number.

4. Change entries. 5. Jog the controller to the left. 6. "Yes" When editing a coming from the mobile phone* or BMW Online*, the changes are not saved on the mobile phone or BMW Online*. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle and only the copy is displayed. Under certain circumstances an identical entry is created.


Communication

Displaying additional information from BMW Online*

2. Select the desired .

Overview

2. Highlighting

Controls

1. Select the desired and highlight the address.

Driving hints

1. "My s"

Mobility

You can change the order in which names are sorted and displayed.

from BMW Online can be synchronised with the navigation data.

Reference

Selecting sort order for names

s

Deleting s Only s saved in the vehicle are deleted. s from the mobile phone* or BMW Online* cannot be deleted. 1. "My s" 2. Highlight the . 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Delete " or "Delete all s".


> There is mobile radio communications reception.

During a connection to BMW Assist, it might be that no telephone connection can be established via the mobile phone. If the mobile phone is to be used, log it out from the vehicle, see page 168.

Information service*

BMW TeleServices*

Afterwards, you can dial a phone number directly or incorporate an address into the route guidance system*.

BMW TeleServices s communication with BMW Service. > Data regarding the service requirements of the vehicle can be transferred directly to BMW Service. This enables BMW Service to prepare for the necessary work in advance. The workshop stay is shortened.

When you call the BMW Assist information service, you can, for example, obtain information on restaurants, all-night chemists, filling stations or hotels and have phone numbers and addresses transmitted to you.

Starting the information service 1. "BMW Services" 2. "Info plus"

> The offering is country-specific. > Connection charges can be incurred. > Services can be limited abroad.

Conditions

3. "Start service"

> BMW Assist is activated.

A voice connection is established to the BMW information service.

> If BMW Assist is not enabled, the selected mobile communications network must Circuit Switched Data, CSD, phone number transfer must be enabled and a mobile phone recommended by BMW for TeleServices must be connected to the vehicle.


> In the event of a breakdown, data regarding the condition of the vehicle can be transferred to Mobile Service*. It might be that malfunctions can be remedied directly.

Driving hints

> The engine is running.

Navigation

BMW Assist can also be used via the Internet, where other services are available: www.bmw.com

> The SIM card is enabled for free service numbers.

Entertainment

The exact offering is country-specific. Your BMW Service will be glad to answer any questions you might have.

You are connected with an employee at the BMW information service to obtain the desired information. You can then have the phone number and address sent to you and transfer them, for instance, into the route guidance system of the navigation system. The BMW infor181


Mobility

BMW Assist provides certain services, e.g. an information service.

> In the case of a mobile phone with UMTS capability: data transfer is switched to solely GSM data transfer.

Reference

BMW Assist*

Controls

BMW Services*

BMW Services

mation service can directly make reservations in many hotels. On reception of information, a list of pick up messages is displayed automatically. Call up the message using the message list, see page 173.

3. "Start service"

Breakdown recovery You can the BMW Group Mobile Service* if you require assistance in the event of a breakdown.

Starting Roadside Assistance Equipment without BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices 1. "BMW Services" 2. "BMW Mobile Care" The number of Roadside Assistance is displayed. If a mobile phone* is logged on, a connection to BMW Roadside Assistance is established.

BMW TeleServices diagnosis* The BMW TeleServices diagnosis enables the transmission of detailed vehicle data that are required for the diagnosis of the vehicle by mobile phone. These data are transferred automatically. A voice connection to the mobile service is established after transmission of the data.

BMW TeleServices Help* BMW Teleservices Help enables a more detailed diagnosis of the vehicle by Mobile Service per mobile telephony. Following a prompt from Mobile Service and after breaking the voice connection, the Teleservices Help can be started.

Starting Teleservices Help 1. Park the vehicle safely. 2. Apply the parking brake.

Equipment with BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices 1. "BMW Services" 2. "BMW Mobile Care"

3. Engine is running. 4. "Teleservice Help" After completion of the Teleservices Help, a voice connection to Mobile Service is established.

Activating BMW Assist* If you have a valid contract with BMW Assist and the services are not displayed, these might have to be activated.


2. Switch on ignition.

Starting BMW Online

Overview

1. Ensure that the vehicle can determine its current location. This is normally possible in the open air.

1. "BMW Services" 2. "BMW Online"

3. "Activate Assist"

BMW Online*

Parts of the software contained in this product are based on work of the Independent JPEG Group.

The BMW Online start page is displayed.

Using BMW Online To select and display content: > Turn the controller to highlight an element. > Press the controller to display the element.

Call up home page 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Display start page"

Conditions

Communication

> You have ed for BMW Online with BMW Service. > A mobile communications network must be available. > The vehicle must be able to determine the location for certain services, e.g. for information at the location. > The current date is set on the Control Display.

Navigation

Licence agreement: This product contains NetFront Browser Software by ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront is a trademark or a ed trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and in other countries.

3. If applicable, select "OK".

Entertainment

BMW Online is an internet portal that provides you with certain in-vehicle services, e.g. information on the weather, current news, share prices, access to e-mails and a personal address book.

Driving hints

Controls

The activation can take a few minutes. If you call up another menu, the activation continues to run in the background.

Reloading a page 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Reload"

Mobility

Cancelling 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Cancel loading"

To display s of BMW Online or other personal data, log on is required. 183 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Reference

Logging in

BMW Services

1. "BMW Services"

Internet*

2. "BMW Online" 3. Call up "Options".

General

4. " "

For your own safety, the internet is available only up to a speed of approximately 5 km/h or 3 mph; in some national market versions internet access is available only when the vehicle is at a complete standstill.

Calling up the internet 1. "BMW Services" 2. "Internet"

5. ":"

3. If applicable, "OK"

6. Enter name and select "OK". 7. ":" 8. Enter . 9. "OK"

Automatic The takes place automatically when BMW Online is called up. " automatically"

Logging off 1. "BMW Services"

The home page is displayed. It is possible that the Internet sites are not displayed in the same way as on a PC. Flash or Java applications may be displayed incorrectly. Licence agreement: This product contains NetFront Browser Software by ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront is a trademark or a ed trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and in other countries. Parts of the software contained in this product are based on work of the Independent JPEG Group.

2. "BMW Online" 3. Call up "Options". 4. " logoff"


A menu bar for operation is displayed. To activate a menu bar, jog the controller to the left and right until the cursor is in the menu bar. Function

symbol.

2. Select letters and characters of the desired address individually. Jog the controller upwards to switch between upper and lower case. 3. Select "OK".

Overview

1. Select the

Menu bar

Symbol

Enter Internet addresses

Controls

Operating the Internet

Activate mouse pointer Call up home page Update, reload

Driving hints

Back Enter URL Bookmarks/favourites Zoom

Navigating with the mouse pointer

Adding bookmarks

1. Select the the right.

The currently displayed page is stored as a bookmark.

2. Navigate to page with mouse pointer. > To move the mouse pointer: jog the controller in the respective direction.

1. Select the

symbol.

2. "Add to bookmarks"

Entertainment

symbol or jog the controller to

> Moving the mouse pointer diagonally: jog the controller in the respective direction and turn the controller. > To select an element: move the mouse pointer onto the element and press the controller. > To scroll: turn the controller.

Status display A symbol in the top left of the Control Display shows the status.

Selecting bookmarks 1. Select the

Navigation

Bookmarks/favourites

symbol.

Communication

Close the browser

Function No connection possible Data transfer/connection Secure connection

Deleting bookmarks 1. Select the

symbol.

2. Mark the bookmark that you would like to delete. 3. Call up "Options".


Reference

Symbol

Mobility

2. Select the desired bookmark.

BMW Services

4. "Delete bookmark" or "Delete all bookmarks".

Hotline Overview The BMW Hotline provides you with information covering every aspect of your vehicle.

Calling the hotline Equipment with BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices 1. "BMW Services"

Specifying a bookmark as home page

2. "Hotline"

1. Select the

3. "Start service"

symbol.

2. Highlight the desired bookmark. 3. Call up "Options". 4. "Set as start page"

Settings

A voice connection to the BMW hotline is established.

Equipment without BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices 1. "BMW Services"

Suppressing cookies

2. "Hotline"


The telephone number of the hotline is displayed. With mobile phone provision, a voice connection is established if applicable.

2. "Suppress cookies"

Suppressing pop-ups 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Suppress pop-ups"

Suppressing security warnings 1. Call up "Options". 2. "Suppress HTTPS pop-ups"

BMW TeleServices* Activating TeleServices The TeleServices must be activated in the vehicle to be able to use them. In most cases this is already done by your Service partner. If the services are not displayed, they might have to be activated. 1. "BMW Services"

TeleServices call* Overview You can send information to BMW Service indicating that you wish to arrange a service appointment. The TeleServices data are transferred. Your Service partner will you if possible.

2. "BMW TeleServices"


Display Service partner

1. "BMW Services"

1. "BMW Services"

2. "Teleservice Call"

2. "Your BMW Dealer"

3. "Start service"

Overview

Starting a TeleServices call

1. "BMW Services" 2. Call up "Options". 3. "Data transfer"

Service status*

1. "Vehicle information" 2. "Vehicle status"

2. "Service status" 3. "Available services"

Activating BMW Assist If these services are not displayed and you have a valid Assist agreement, they must be activated. "Activate Assist"

Activate BMW TeleServices It is possible that you must activate TeleServices in the vehicle. "Activate TeleServices"

Deactivating BMW TeleServices 3. Call up "Options".

A voice connection to Mobile Service is still possible if TeleServices are deactivated.

4. "Last Teleservice Call"

"Deactivate TeleServices"

Mobility

Service partners*

Navigation

1. "BMW Services"

Entertainment

You can check when your BMW Service partner was notified.

Display of all services available in the vehicle.

Communication

The TeleServices data on the service status of your vehicle are transmitted automatically to your BMW Service before a due date. If possible, BMW Service will you and you can make a service appointment.

Display available services

Address and data of the BMW Service partner.


Reference

Automatic TeleServices call*

Driving hints

The status of the data transfer is displayed.

Controls

Data transmission*


Mobility To assist you in preserving your vehicle's mobility, this section contains important information on operating fluids, wheels and tyres, routine maintenance work and minor repairs.


Refuelling

Refuelling Tank cap Opening 1. Tap the tank cap at the rear edge.

1. Push the cover to the back and out of the luggage compartment side and remove. 2. Turn the tank cap counter-clockwise. 3. Place the tank cap in the holder on the flap.

2. Pull the tank cap with the fuel pump symbol from the mount. The fuel filler flap is released.

Note when refuelling When refuelling, insert the filler nozzle fully into the filler neck. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle during refuelling, otherwise: > The supply of fuel may be cut off prematurely > Fuel vapour and fumes will be fed back less effectively.

Closing Fit the tank cap and turn clockwise until it is clearly heard to click into place. Do not jam the strap attached to the tank cap, as otherwise the tank cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapours can escape.<

Manually releasing the fuel filler flap E.g. in the event of an electrical defect.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle cuts out for the first time. Observe the safety regulations displayed at service stations when handling fuels, as otherwise there is a risk of personal injury and damage to property.<

Fuel tank capacity Petrol engine, fuel tank capacity: approx. 63 litres or 13.8 Imp. gal. Diesel engine, fuel tank capacity: approx. 61 litres or 13.4 Imp. gal. If the remaining operating range is below 50 km, approx. 30 miles, it is imperative to



Reference

Mobility

Communication

Entertainment

Navigation

Driving hints

Controls

Overview

add fuel, otherwise the engine's functions are not assured and damage may occur.<

Fuel

Fuel Fuel grade

Winter-grade diesel Do not add any additives, not even petrol, to avoid engine damage.<

Petrol For optimal fuel economy, the petrol should be sulphur-free or as low in sulphur content as possible.

You are required to use winter-grade diesel during the cold season to ensure operational safety of the diesel engine.

Never use fuel containing lead, as otherwise the catalytic converter will be permanently damaged.<

This type of fuel is sold by service stations during this period of time.

You can fill up with fuels with a maximum proportion of ethanol of 10Ξ, i.e. E10.

Fuel filter heating is installed as standard equipment to prevent the fuel from solidifying during operation.

Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing 85Ξ ethanol, nor with flex fuel. Otherwise the engine and fuel supply system will be damaged.<

Petrol grades The engine is anti-knock controlled. For this reason, several fuel grades can be refuelled. We recommend unleaded grade petrol with 95 RON. Unleaded fuel grades with 91 RON and higher are permitted. Do not fill the tank with any petrol below 91 RON, as otherwise the engine could be damaged.<

Diesel Do not use rapeseed methyl ester RME, biodiesel or petrol. If the wrong type of fuel has been added, do not start the engine, otherwise you risk causing damage to it.< The filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel pumps. Service if the wrong type of fuel has been added.

Diesel grade The engine is designed for DIN EN 590 diesel fuel.


Safety information Tyre characteristics and tyre inflation pressure influence the following: > Service life of the tyres > Driving safety

mentioned on the label. Since inflation pressures for tyres that may be covered by the label – by size, speed category and load rating/load index – but not explicitly mentioned on the label may be different, please obtain adequate inflation pressures in accordance with the tyre manufacturer's specifications at your tyre dealer.<

Overview

Tyre pressures

Controls

Wheels and tyres

Reinitialise Run Flat Indicator after correcting the tyre inflation pressure.

Summer tyres

Tyre pressure values

Tyre tread Do not use tyres below a tread depth of 3 mm or 1/8 in. There is a high risk of aquaplaning with a tread depth of less than 3 mm or approx. 1/8 in.

Winter tyres Do not use tyres below a tread depth of 4 mm or approx. 3/16 in. Winter suitability is restricted below a tread depth of 4 mm or approx. 3/16 in.

Minimum tread depth Pressure values for approved tyre sizes are located on the door column of the driver's door. If you are unable to find the tyres' speed code letter, the tyre inflation pressure of the respective size applies, e.g. 255/45 R 17.

Inflation pressures are specified on the tyre label affixed to the driver's door post. The inflation pressures on the tyre label are applicable only for tyres explicitly

Mobility

For customers in Australia/New Zealand

Navigation

Your Service can provide you with more information on wheels and tyres.

Entertainment

Check the tyre pressure regularly and correct, if applicable: at least twice a month and before setting out on any long journey. Incorrect tyre pressures can adversely affect the vehicle's roadholding and cause tyre damage, which could result in an accident.<

Communication

These tyre pressure values apply to the approved tyre sizes and makes.

Wear indicators are distributed around the tyre's circumference. They have a legally


Reference

Checking pressures

Driving hints

Tyre sizes

> Driving comfort

Wheels and tyres

required minimum height of 1.6 mm or approx. 1/16 in.

Wheel/tyre combination

These are indicated by the letters TWI, Tread Wear Indicator, on the tyre flanks.

Your Service will provide you with information on the correct wheel/tyre combination and the correct rim design for your vehicle.

Tyre damage

The function of several system is adversely affected by an incorrect wheel/tyre combination, e.g. ABS or DSC.

Frequently check tyres for damage, foreign matter and wear. Indications for tyre damage or other damage to the vehicle: > Unusual vibration while the car is being driven > Unusual driving characteristics like pulling severely to the left or right If there are any indications on tyre damage, reduce your speed immediately and have wheels and tyres checked to avoid an increased accident risk. Proceed with caution to the nearest Service or specialist tyre dealer. Have the vehicle towed there if necessary.<

Age of tyres

To maintain the vehicle's good road behaviour, always fit tyres of the same make and tread pattern to all wheels. After a tyre has been damaged, fit the original wheel/tyre combination. Your vehicle manufacturer recommends to only use wheels and tyres that have been approved for your respective car type. Otherwise the tyres could be in with the body due to, e.g. impermissible tolerances despite being of an approved size. This could cause accidents. Your vehicle manufacturer is unable to assess the suitability of wheels and tyres it has not approved and cannot therefore guarantee their safety.<

Recommended makes of tyre

Recommendation We recommend replacing tyres after a maximum of 6 years regardless of the wear.

Manufacturing date On the tyre flanks: DOT ... 5009: tyre was made in the 50th week of 2009.

Replacing wheels and tyres Fitting Have the tyres fitted and balanced by Service only. If such work is performed inexpertly, it could result in consequential damage and thus constitute a safety risk.<

Certain tyre makes are recommended by your vehicle manufacturer for each tyre size. These are marked with a star on the tyre flank. When properly used, these tyres meet the highest standards in of safety and handling characteristics.

Retreaded tyres Your vehicle manufacturer recommends not to use retreaded tyres.


Protect tyres against contamination from oil, grease and fuel. Do not exceed the maximum tyre pressure stated on the tyre flank.

Overview

Their carcasses may differ in internal construction or age, therefore restricting their durability and having adverse effects on driving safety.<

Winter tyres Controls

Run-flat tyres* Designation

Driving hints

Although all-season tyres with an M+S marking have better winter characteristics than summer tyres, they do not normally match the performance of winter tyres.

Maximum speed with winter tyres

When fitting new tyres or changing over from summer to winter tyres or vice versa, fit run-flat tyres for your own safety. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. You Service will be glad to inform you on this topic.

Swapping wheels between the axles Your vehicle manufacturer does not recommend replacing the front wheels with the back wheels or vice versa, even if the tyres are of the same size.

For information on continuing to drive with a damaged tyre, see Indication of a flat tyre, page 81.

Replacing run-flat tyres For your own safety, only use run-flat tyres. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. You Service will be glad to inform you on this topic.

Snow chains*

This could have an adverse effect on driving characteristics.

Fine-link snow chains

With mixed tyre sizes, swapping over between the axles is not permitted.

Only certain fine-link snow chains have been tested, classified as safe for use and recommended by your vehicle manufacturer.

Tyre storage

Your Service is able to provide details.

Store wheels and tyres in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.


Navigation

The reinforcement on the tyre flank ensures that the tyre can be used, subject to certain circumstances, even if depressurised.

Entertainment

Run-flat tyres*

The wheels comprise a conditionally self-ing tyre and special rim.

Communication

Always comply with the speed limit of the winter tyres to avoid tyre damage and resulting accidents.<

RSC designation on the tyre flank.

Mobility

If the car is capable of speeds higher than that permitted for the winter tyres, a label stating the maximum permitted speed for the tyres fitted must be displayed in your field of view. Specialist tyre dealers and Service can supply these labels.

Reference

We recommend winter tyres for operation on winter roads or at temperatures below +76/ 457.

Wheels and tyres

Use Fit snow chains in pairs and only on the rear wheels. Please observe the information of the snow chain manufacturer. Please ensure that snow chains are always under sufficient tension. Retension according to the manufacturer's instructions, if required. Do not initialise the Run Flat Indicator to avoid incorrect reading. When driving with snow chains, you may find it helpful to activate DTC temporarily, see page 78.

Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 50 km/h or approx. 30 mph.


Engine oil filler cap, see Adding engine oil

2

Vehicle Identification Number

6

3

Filler neck for washer fluid for headlight cleaning system and windscreen washer, see page 58

Dipstick* for engine oil, see oil level check with dipstick

7

Diesel engine: coolant expansion tank, see page 201

4

Jump-starting, positive terminal

Petrol engine: the expansion tank is on the opposite side of the vehicle

Engine compartment lid Open engine compartment lid Do not work on the vehicle unless you possess the necessary technical knowledge. Have work on the vehicle carried out by your Service if you do not possess technical knowledge. If such work is performed inexpertly, it could result in consequential damage and thus constitute a safety risk.<

In order to avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windscreen before you open the engine compartment. Only open the engine compartment lid when the engine has cooled down, as otherwise injuries can occur.<


Communication

5

Mobility

Jump-starting, negative terminal

Reference

1

Entertainment

Navigation

Driving hints

Controls

Important accessories in the engine compartment

Overview

Engine compartment

Engine compartment

Engine oil

1. Pull the lever.

Oil level check with dipstick* 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface with the engine at operating temperature, i.e. after driving continuously for at least 10 km or 6.5 miles. 2. Switch off the engine.

2. Lift the engine-compartment lid all the way up. 3. Press the release lever and open the lid.

3. Remove the dipstick after approx. 5 minutes and wipe with a lint-free cloth, paper cloth or similar. 4. Carefully push the dipstick fully into its tube, then pull it out again. The oil level must be between the two marks on the dipstick.

Closing the engine compartment lid The quantity of oil between the two dipstick marks is approx. 1 litre, approx. 1.8 Imp. pt. Do not add oil beyond the upper dipstick mark. Adding too much oil will harm the engine.<

Electronic oil level check* Close the engine compartment lid from a height of approx. 40 cm, approx. 16 in. It must be clearly heard to engage. If you notice during the journey that the engine compartment lid has not been properly closed, stop the vehicle at the earliest possible moment and close it correctly.<

Conditions > Engine running and at operating temperature after a drive of at least 10 km or 6.5 miles. > Vehicle is stationary or driving on even roads.

To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing area of the engine compartment lid is unobstructed.<


Oil level too high.

1. Tap button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol and "OIL" are shown in the display. 2. Press button 2 on the turn indicator lever. The oil level is checked and the reading displayed.

Possible displays Function

Oil level OK

The oil level sensor is defective. Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated distance remaining to the next oil service, see page 66. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Display via iDrive 2. "Vehicle status"


Oil level is being checked. This can take about 3 minutes if the vehicle is at a standstill on a level surface, or about 5 minutes while the vehicle is on the move.

Entertainment


Mobility

3. "Engine oil level"


Reference

Symbol

Adding too much oil will harm the engine. Have the vehicle checked without delay.<

Controls

Function

Oil level down to minimum: Add engine oil at the earliest opportunity, but no more than 1 litre, approx. 1.7 Imp pt., see also Adding engine oil on page 200.

Driving hints

Symbol

Navigation

Display in the instrument cluster

Engine compartment

Possible messages > "Engine oil level OK" > "Measurement not possible at this time." > "Measuring engine oil level...": This can take about 3 minutes if the vehicle is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running, and about 5 minutes while the vehicle is on the move. If the engine oil has been topped up, determining the oil level can take up to 30 minutes. > "Engine oil level below minimum. Add one litre!" Add engine oil at the earliest opportunity, but no more than 1 litre or 1.7 Imp. pt., see also Adding engine oil below. If the oil level is indicated as below minimum, immediately add engine oil, as otherwise engine damage can occur. > "Engine oil level too high! Have this checked." Adding too much oil will harm the engine. Have the vehicle checked without delay.< > "Measurement inactive. Have this checked." Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated distance remaining to the next oil service, see page 66. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oil Oil filler cap

sage appears on the Control Display, or with diesel engines when the oil level has fallen to just above the lower mark on the dipstick, see page 198. Top up the oil level within the next 200 km or 125 miles, otherwise the engine may suffer damage.< Keep oils and greases etc. out of the reach of children and comply with the warnings on the containers. Otherwise, these products may pose health risks.<

Oil types Do not use any oil additives, otherwise the engine could be damaged.<

Approved engine oils Your Service will inform you about engine oil types that have been approved by your vehicle manufacturer. Engine oil quality is a decisive factor for your engine's service life. Approved engine oils comply with the following specifications: Petrol engine Preferred:

BMW Longlife-01 BMW Longlife-01 FE

Alternatively:

BMW Longlife-04 BMW Longlife-98

Diesel engine Preferred:

BMW Longlife-04

Alternatively:

BMW Longlife-01 BMW Longlife-98

Approved oils belong to viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40 and SAE 5W-30.

Alternative oil grades

Only add a maximum of 1 litre, approx. 1.7 Imp. pt., of oil when a corresponding mes-

If approved oils are not available, amounts of up to 1 litre, approx. 1.8 Imp. pt. of a different oil with the following specifications may be used: ACEA A3/B4


5. Fit the cap and turn until it is clearly heard to click into place. 6. Have the cause of coolant loss rectified as soon as possible.

Overview

When selecting a ACEA A3/B4 oil, please observe that the oil must belong viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40 and SAE 5W-30, otherwise this could result in malfunctions or engine damage.<

When disposing of coolant additives, comply with the relevant environmental protection laws.<

Coolant General

Driving hints

Do not open the cooling system when the engine is hot, otherwise escaping coolant may cause scalding.<

Controls

Disposal

Use only suitable additives, otherwise the engine could suffer damage. Additives damage your health.< Coolant consists of water and coolant additives.

Navigation

Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your vehicle. Your Service is informed about suitable additives.

Checking coolant level

Entertainment

1. Only open the engine compartment lid if the engine has cooled down. 2. Turn the cap on the expansion tank slightly anti-clockwise until it starts to open, then allow the pressure to escape before opening it fully.

4. If necessary, slowly top up to correct level but do not overfill.


Reference

Mobility

Communication

3. The coolant level is correct if it is between the maximum and minimum marks in the filler neck, see also diagram next to the filler neck.

Routine maintenance work

Routine maintenance work BMW Maintenance System

Ensure that the date has been set correctly, see page 69, otherwise the correct function of condition-based service (CBS) cannot be guaranteed.<

Downtimes Downtimes with a disconnected battery are not taken into .

The system maintains traffic and operational safety of the vehicle and takes aspects like having the vehicle checked in due time. Its purpose is to optimise maintenance measures with a view to minimising the cost of looking after your vehicle.

Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and advanced algorithms take of the varying conditions in which your vehicle is used. This helps condition-based service to determine the required routine maintenance work. For this reason, the system enables the scope of routine maintenance work to be adapted to the individual profile.

Have the scope of routine maintenance work depending on time, e.g. brake fluid and, if applicable, engine oil and micro/active charcoal filter, carried out by your Service.

Service booklet Have routine maintenance work and repair work carried out by Service. Service must confirm routine maintenance work in the service booklet. Entries are proof of regular routine maintenance work.

For customers in Australia/ New Zealand Routine maintenance work The service schedule as prescribed in the Service Booklet is valid also for Australian vehicles.

Detailed service requirements can be displayed on the Control Display, see page 66. More information on items that need regular maintenance and on the scope of maintenance required can be found from page 238 onwards.

Service data in the remote control Information on the required routine maintenance work is continuously saved on the remote control. Service reads out this data and suggests and optimised scope of routine maintenance work. For this reason hand over the remote control last used to the service assistant. 202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Overview

Your Service can provide you with information on this topic.

Driving hints

Controls

Socket for on-board diagnosis OBD

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side to check components that are crucial for the composition of exhaust gases.

Emissions

Navigation

Warning light lights up: Vehicle produces higher emissions. You can continue your trip. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

Entertainment

Warning light flashes: Engine malfunction that can damage the catalytic converter. You can continue your trip, but moderate your speed and exercise due caution. Have the vehicle checked without delay.

Data memory

Recycling Your vehicle manufacturer recommends to return the vehicle to a return point commissioned by BMW Group. Vehicle recycling is subject to the respective national regulations. 203 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Communication

Your vehicle saves data about operation, faults and settings. This data is saved in the vehicle and partly also in the remote control. The information can be read out with suitable devices, especially at the Service centre. The information read out in this way is used to service processes and repair or for optimising and developing vehicle functions. If an Assist contract exists additionally, certain vehicle data can be sent directly from the vehicle to enable the desired services.

General care

General care Washing the vehicle Notes If you use steam-jet cleaners or highpressure cleaners, make sure you maintain an adequate distance and a maximum temperature of 606/1407. Insufficient distance, too high pressure or too high temperatures cause damage or premature damage that can lead to long-term damage. Comply with the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner.< Do not apply high-pressure cleaners for an extended period of time. Please maintain a distance of at least 30 cm or 11.8 in when applying high-pressure washers to sensors and cameras on the outside of the vehicle e.g. Park Distance Control* or rear-view camera*.<

> Remove additional attachment parts, e.g. spoilers or telephone aerial, if they could be damaged. Avoid car washes with a guide rail height of more than 10 cm or 3.9 in, otherwise this could result in damage to the wheel suspension.<

Automatic gearbox Keep to the following steps to allow the vehicle to roll: 1. Insert the remote control into the ignition lock, even if the vehicle is equipped with convenient access. 2. Move the selector lever to position N. 3. Release the handbrake. 4. Switch the engine off.

During the winter months in particular, clean the vehicle more frequently.

5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll.

Very high levels of dirt and road salt can cause damage to the car.

Headlights

Cleaning in automatic car washes

> Do not rub them dry or use caustic or abrasive cleaning agents.

You can clean your vehicle in an automatic car wash right from the beginning.

> Soak dirt, e.g. dead insects with shampoo and wash down with plenty of water.

Preferably use car washes with soft, textile brushes to avoid damaging the paint.

> Use de-icer spray to remove ice deposits, not a scraper.

Notes

After washing the vehicle

Please observe the following:

After washing the vehicle, drive it briefly and apply the brakes to dry them out; this is necessary to prevent reduced braking effect and also to avoid corrosion of the brake discs.

> Wheels and tyres must not be damaged by transporting devices. > Fold in outside mirrors, otherwise they could be damaged due to the width of the vehicle. > Deactivate the rain sensor*, see page 56, to avoid unintentional wiping. > Bring the rear wiper home position, deactivate it and protect from damage. If necessary, ask the car wash operator about appropriate protection measures.

Vehicle care Care products BMW recommends using BMW cleaning and care products because they have been tested and approved.


Frequently remove dust with a cloth or a vacuum cleaner.

Rubber seals

Dust and dirt from the road chafe the pores and folds and lead to a high degree of wear as well as premature brittleness of the leather surface.

Do not use any silicone-based care products for treating rubber seals, as these could otherwise be damaged and become a source of noise.

Clean bright leather more frequently as dirt tends to be more visible.

Fine wood parts*

To avoid colouring, e.g. from clothes, treat leather every two months.

Clean fine wood trim and wooden parts with a wet cloth only. Subsequently rub dry with a soft cloth.

Use leather care products because otherwise dirt and grease will attack the leather's protective layer. Suitable care products are available from your Service.

Upholstery material/Alcantara fabric/ fabric trims Apply vacuum cleaner regularly. In the event of heavy soiling, e.g. stains from drinks, use a soft sponge or a microfibre cloth with suitable interior cleaning agents. Clean upholstery materials over a large area up to the seams. Avoid strong rubbing. Open Velcro fasteners on tros or other items of clothing can damage seat covers. Make sure that any Velcro fasteners on your clothing are closed.<

Use water and rubber care products.

Plastic parts These include: > Imitation leather surfaces > Roof lining > Light covers > Glass cover of instrument cluster > Moulded parts in matt black Use a microfibre cloth for cleaning. Clean with water and possibly a plastic cleaning agent.

Overview

Do not soak the roof lining. Do not use cleaning agents that contain alcohol or solvent, e.g. thinner, detergent, fuel or similar, otherwise surfaces may be damaged.<


Mobility

Leather care

Carefully clean parts such as the radiator grille and door handles with plenty of water and shampoo additive, especially whenever the vehicle is exposed to the effects of road salt.

Controls

Chrome-like surfaces*

Environmental influences can have effect on the vehicle's paintwork. Adapt the frequency and extent of vehicle care accordingly.

Driving hints

Regular care contributes towards driving safety and retaining the car's value.

Navigation

Vehicle paintwork

During the winter months in particular, apply wheel cleaning agent. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strong alkaline or rough cleaning agents or steam-jet cleaners hotter than 606/1407; please observe the manufacturer's information.

Entertainment

Alloy wheels

Communication

Care of special parts

Reference

Observe the notes on the pack. Open windows or doors when cleaning on the inside. Only use agents meant for vehicle care. Cleaning agents can contain hazardous substances or constitute a health risk.<

General care

Seat belts Dirt on the seat belts can interfere with the action of the reel and represent a safety hazard. Do not dry-clean or use chemical products, otherwise the fabric may be weakened.< Clean only when fitted and with mild alkaline soap solutions. Only retract seatbelts when dry.

Carpets and car mats* You can remove the car mats to clean the interior. Secure against slipping when refitting the car mats. In case of heavy soiling, clean the carpets with a microfibre cloth and water or fabric cleaning agent. For this purpose rub to the front and back in the direction of travel to avoid felting.

Sensors/cameras Keep sensors and cameras on the outside of the vehicle, e.g. Park Distance Control*, clean and free off ice to ensure full functionality.

Displays/screens Use a microfibre cloth to e.g. clean the Control Display*. Do not use chemical or household cleaning agents. Keep all substances and moisture from the device. There is otherwise a risk of surfaces or electrical components being attacked or damaged. Avoid excess pressure and the use of scratching materials during cleaning to avoid damage.<

Laying up out of use Please obtain information from your Service if you wish to place your vehicle in storage for longer than three months.


Toolkit

Overview

Replacing parts

1. Fold the wiper arm upwards and hold it. 2. Press the retaining spring, arrows 1, and fold the wiper blade upwards, arrow 2.

Lights and bulbs are important elements in of your driving safety. Your vehicle manufacturer recommends that any bulb-related routines that you are not familiar with or that are not described here be entrusted to BMW Service. 1. To replace the wipers fold them upwards, see page 58. 2. Fold the wiper arm upwards and hold it. 3. Press the retaining spring, arrows 1, and fold the wiper blade upwards, arrow 2. 4. Remove the wiper blade by pulling to the front away from the holder. In order to avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windscreen before you open the engine compartment.<

A box containing spare bulbs is available from BMW Service. Only change bulbs while they are cool to the touch. Otherwise, burns could result.< When working on lighting systems, always begin by switching off the light in question, as otherwise short circuits could result. Observe any instructions supplied by the bulb manufacturer, to avoid the risk of injury or damage when changing bulbs.< Do not touch the glass of a new bulb with the fingers, because even slight amounts of dirt or grease will then be burned into the bulb and reduce its working life. 207


Entertainment

General

Communication

Replacing lights and bulbs

Front

Mobility

Replacing wiper blades

Navigation

3. Remove the wiper blade by pulling to the front away from the holder.

Reference

The on-board toolkit is located in the luggage compartment under the floor and the storage compartment.

Driving hints

Controls

Rear

Replacing parts

Use a clean tissue, cloth or similar, or hold the bulb by its base.<

Light-emitting diodes, LEDs Controls, displays and other equipment items inside your vehicle have light-emitting diodes behind a cover as their light source. These LEDs resemble conventional lasers and are classified as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. Do not remove the covers or expose the eyes directly to the unfiltered light source for several hours at a time, as this could cause irritation to the retina.<

1

Cover for high-beam headlight

2

Cover for low-beam headlight

3

Turn indicator holder

Xenon headlights*

> High-beam headlight: fold latch, arrow 4, and remove cover from guide.

A failure of the bulbs is highly unlikely due to their long service life. Switching them on and off frequently reduces their service life.

To remove the covers:

> Low-beam headlight: unscrew and remove the cover, arrow 5.

If a bulb fails, you can continue your trip with activated fog lights. Please exercise due caution. Please observe country-specific laws.

Take care when installing the covers, as otherwise leaks could occur and cause damage to the headlight system.<

Have work on the Xenon light system, including bulb replacement carried out only by Service. Work that is improperly carried out could otherwise result in a risk of fatal injury due to high voltage.<

Follow the same steps in reverse order to refit the covers.

Headlight lenses Condensation might form on the inside of the headlight lenses in cool or damp weather. When the lights are switched on, the condensation disappears after a short time. There is no need to replace the headlight lenses.

Access through the wheel well Low-beam headlights and turn indicators only: 1. Turn the wheel inwards. 2. Open the flap in the wheel well. For this purpose turn the fastener anti-clockwise to the stop with e.g. a coin.

In the event of more extensive moisture, for example water droplets in the light, have this checked at your Service Centre.

Remove headlight cover The high-beam headlight bulbs can be replaced from inside the engine compartment; access to the low-beam headlight bulbs and the turn indicator bulbs is through a flap in each wheel well.


Low-beam headlights and high-beam headlights

2. Remove the cover for the high-beam headlight, see page 208.

The H7 bulb is pressurised, so wear goggles and gloves. There is otherwise a risk of injury if the bulb is damaged.<

3. Pull out the bulb holder, see arrow.

H7 bulb, 55 watts 1. Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.

5. Push the wire bracket to the side out of the mounting, arrow 1, and fold it down, arrow 2.

5. Insert the bulb holder. 6. Reattach the cover.

Xenon headlights* Side lights, parking lights and daytime driving lights H8 bulb, 35 watts 1. Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock. 2. Remove the cover for the high-beam headlight, see page 208.

Communication

3. Turn the bulb approx. 90°, see arrow, and pull it out.

Navigation

4. Disconnect the plug from the light.

4. Pull out the bulb and change it.

Entertainment

3. Remove the appropriate cover, see page 208.

Driving hints

There are separate headlight covers for lowbeam headlights and high-beam headlights.

2. Low-beam headlight: open the flap in the wheel well, see Access through the wheel well on page 208.

Overview

1. Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.

Controls

Halogen headlights

6. Remove the bulb. 7. Insert the new bulb. 8. Fold up the wire bracket and lock it. 9. Connect the plug. 10. Reattach the cover.

Side and parking lights

5. Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops. 6. Reattach the cover.


Reference

5 watt bulb, W5W

4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and reconnect the plug.

Mobility

11. Low-beam headlight: attach the flap to the wheel well.

Replacing parts

Front turn indicators

Rear lights

PY21W bulb, 21 watts

The rear lights are divided into two parts. One part is in the tailgate, the other is in the side section.

1. Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock. 2. Open the flap in the wheel well, see Access through the wheel well on page 208.

Bulbs P21W, 21 W

Rear lights for Halogen headlights

3. Turn the turn indicator holder 1 to the left and remove.

1

Reversing light

4. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left, take out and change it.

2

Braking light/parking light/rear lights

3

Flashing turn indicator

4

Rear fog light*

5. Insert turn-indicator socket 1 and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. 6. Attach the flap to the wheel well.

Rear lights for Xenon headlights*

Lateral turn indicators 5 watt bulb, W5W 1. Press the light back at the front edge with your finger tip, arrow 1 and take out with a swivel movement, arrow 2.

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove while simultaneously lifting the safety clamp. 3. Pull out the bulb and replace.

1

Reversing light

2

Parking lights/rear lights LED

3

Brake light

4

Flashing turn indicator

5

Rear fog light*

Service if bulb 2 is faulty.

Lights in the side section All bulbs are integrated into a central bulb holder.

To fit, place the bulb at the back and press in at the front.


3. Slacken the screws of the tailgate trim, arrows.

4. Unclip the tailgate trim by pulling it down.

5. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left, take out and change it. 6. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly clicks into place.

Navigation 8. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly clicks into place. 9. Slip the handle for manual opening through the hole in the tailgate trim and push it in. 10. Reattach tailgate trim.

7. Re-install the cover.

Rear fog lights in the tailgate 1. Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock. 2. Remove the warning triangle from the holder, see page 217.

Entertainment

7. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left, take out and change it.

Communication

4. Press lower tensioning clamps together, arrows 2, and remove bulb holder.

6. Release and remove bulb holder with clip, see arrows.

Licence plate light, centre brake light and parking/rear light* These lights use LED technology. Service in case of a defect.

Repairing a flat tyre Safety precautions in the event of a puncture: 211


Mobility

On the right side, if necessary first work the button with the fuel-pump symbol forward and out of the holder.<

Reference

3. Disengage the bulb holder by pressing the upper tensioning clamps down, arrow 1.

5. Push out the handle for manual opening in the vent of an electrical fault, see page 31, slip it through the opening and remove the trim .

Driving hints

Controls

2. Push the cover to the back and out of the luggage compartment side and remove.

Overview

1. Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.

Replacing parts

Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic, on a firm surface. Switch on the hazard warning flashers. Allow the steering wheel lock to engage with the wheels in the straight-ahead position. Apply the handbrake and engage first gear or reverse or selector-lever position P. All occupants must leave the vehicle and be led to a point where they are not exposed to risk, for example behind a crash barrier at the side of the road. If necessary, set up a warning triangle* or a flashing warning light* at a sufficient distance. Comply with relevant local laws.<

Sealant and compressor

1

Sealant bottle and sticker with speed limit

2

Filler hose Please note the expiry date on the sealant bottle.<

In the event of a puncture, the proper procedure depends on your vehicle's equipment: > BMW Mobility System*, see the following section > Run-flat tyres*, see page 195

BMW Mobility System* Preparation The Mobility system is located in the luggage compartment under the floor and the storage compartment.

3

Holder for the sealant bottle

4

Compressor

5

Plug and cable for the socket on the inside of the vehicle, see page 100

6

Connecting hose for connecting compressor and sealant bottle or compressor and wheel

If an object has penetrated the tyre, it is best to leave it in position.

7

On/off switch

8

Pressure gauge for displaying tyre pressure

Comply with the instructions for application of the Mobility System on the compressor and sealant bottle.<

9

Deflating button for reducing tyre pressure

Use of the Mobility System may be ineffective for tyre damage measuring more than approx. 4 mm, approx. 3/16 in. Please the nearest BMW Service, see page 217, if the tyre cannot be rendered usable again with the Mobility System.

Peel the speed limit reminder sticker off the sealant bottle and affix it to the steering wheel.

The plug, cable and connecting hose are stored in the compressor housing.

Using the M Mobility System To repair a punctured tyre with the Mobility System, proceed as follows: > Fill sealing agent. > Spread sealing agent. > Correct tyre inflation pressure.


2. Unscrew connecting hose 6 of the compressor from the sealant cylinder. 3. Connect filler hose 2 of the sealant cylinder to the free port on the sealant cylinder. This can prevent sealant residues from escaping from the cylinder. 4. Pack the empty sealing agent bottle to avoid soiling of the luggage compartment. 5. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

4. Unscrew the dust cap from the valve of the damaged tyre and screw the filler hose 2 of the sealant bottle onto the valve. 5. Make sure that the compressor is switched off. 6. Insert plug 5 into the socket on the inside of the vehicle, see page 100. 7. When the engine is running: Switch on the compressor and let run for approx. 3 to 8 minutes to fill the sealant and achieve a tyre pressure of approx. 2.5 bar, approx. 36.3 psi.

Distributing the sealant Immediately drive approx. 5 km, approx. 3 miles, so that the sealant becomes evenly distributed around the tyre's interior. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, approx. 50 mph. If possible, maintain a speed of at least 20 km/h, approx. 12 mph.<

Correct tyre inflation pressure 1. Stop in a suitable place after driving for approx. 5 km, approx. 3 miles.

While you are filling the sealant, the inflation pressure can briefly rise to approx. 5 bar, approx. 72.5 psi. In this phase, do not switch the compressor off.<

2. Screw the connecting hose 6 from the compressor directly onto the tyre valve.

Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes, otherwise the unit will overheat and could sustain damage.<

4. Adjust the tyre pressure to 2.5 bar, approx. 36.3 psi. For this reason turn the engine on:

8. Switch off the compressor. If a tyre pressure of 2 bar/29 psi is not achieved: 1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 from the wheel and drive approx. 10 m or 32 ft to the front

3. Insert the plug 5 into the socket on the inside of the vehicle.

> To increase pressure: switch on the compressor. Switch the compressor off briefly to gauge the current tyre pressure.


Overview Controls

1. Unscrew filler hose 2 of the sealant cylinder from the wheel.

Driving hints

Stowing Mobility System

Navigation

3. Insert the sealant bottle into the compressor housing so that it is standing upright.

If a tyre pressure of 2 bar/29 psi still cannot be achieved, the tyre damage is too severe. the nearest Service.<

Entertainment

2. Remove the connecting hose 6 from the compressor housing completely and bolt onto the connector of the sealing agent bottle. Make sure not to bend the connecting hose.

Communication

1. Shake the sealant bottle.

2. Pump up the tyre again with the compressor.

Mobility

Adhere strictly to the specified procedure, otherwise sealant could escape under high pressure.<

and back to allow the sealing agent to spread in the tyre.

Reference

Filling with sealant

Replacing parts

Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes, otherwise the unit will overheat and could sustain damage.<

Theft-proof wheel studs*

> To reduce pressure: press deflating button 9. If the pressure is not maintained, take the vehicle for another drive, see Distributing the sealant. Then repeat steps 1 to 4 once. If a tyre pressure of 2 bar/29 psi still cannot be achieved, the tyre damage is too severe. the nearest Service.<

1

Wheel stud

Continuing the trip

2

Adapter, in toolkit

Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h, approx. 50 mph, otherwise there is a risk of accidents.<

Removing

Reinitialise the Run Flat Indicator, see page 81 for further notes. Have the faulty tyre and the sealant bottle of the Mobility System replaced as soon as possible.<

1. Push adapter 2 onto the wheel stud. 2. Unscrew the wheel stud 1. Be sure to remove the adapter after installing the wheel stud.

Car battery

Changing a wheel

Routine maintenance work

Matching tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your Service.

The battery needs no routine maintenance whatsoever, in other words the quantity of acid it contains will normally last for the full service life of the battery.

Jack mounting points

Your Service will be glad to answer any queries on batteries.

Replacing the battery Only use vehicle battery types that have been approved by your vehicle manufacturer, otherwise you could damage your vehicle and systems and functions are not, or only partly, available.< The jacking points are at the positions shown in the illustration.

After battery replacement, have your battery ed in the vehicle by your Service so all convenient functions are unrestrictedly available.

Battery recharging Recharge the battery only with the engine switched off using the connections in the


Overview

engine compartment. Connections, see Jumpstarting on page 217.

Power failure Some settings must be reinitialised after a temporary power cut.

Controls

Individual settings must be updated again: > Time: update, see page 68. Access to the fuse box:

> Navigation system: wait for the full functionality of navigation.

2. Push the damper forward, arrow 1, to disengage it from the bottom mount.

> Panorama glass roof: it is possible that you may only be able to lift the roof. Have the system initialised by Service.

3. Unlatch the glove box by pressing both latches, arrows 2, and tilt it down.

> Seat and mirror memory: memorise the positions again, see page 40. > Digital com: calibrate system, see page 97.

Plastic tweezers are located on the power distributor. See the rear of the cover for information on fuse assignment. Spare fuses are available from your Service.

Entertainment

> xDrive: system is automatically initialised while the vehicle is moving. During this period, indicator lights are shown. If the lights do not go out during the current trip, have the system checked.

Driving hints

1. Open glove box.

Navigation

> Radio stations: memorise again, see page 141.

Dispose of old battery

Communication

Have old batteries disposed of by Service or return to a collection point. Batteries filled with acid should be transported and stored upright. Secure against falling over during transport.<

Fuses

Mobility

Do not repair blown fuses or replace them with fuses of different colours or ampere ratings, otherwise overloaded electrical wires can cause a fire in the vehicle.<


Reference

> Date: update, see page 69

Breakdown assistance

Breakdown assistance Hazard warning flashers

The button for the hazard warning lights is located in the centre console.

Initiating an emergency call

1. Briefly press the cover flap to open it. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the button lights up.

Emergency call*

> LED lights up: connection is being established.

Conditions

> LED flashes, if a connection to the emergency call number has been established.

> Equipped with Business mobile phone provision. Emergency call also possible if no mobile phone is logged-on to the vehicle. > BMW Assist is activated, see page 182. > Radio ready state is switched on. > Emergency call system is operative. It is a punishable offence to misuse the emergency call system. Even if a BMW Assist emergency call is not ed, it is still possible to initiate an emergency call within most GSM networks using the button. These emergency call numbers and the and conditions of use can deviate from country to country.

Participation agreement > If the BMW Assist participation agreement expires, the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by Service without visiting a workshop. > The BMW Assist system can be re-enabled under certain circumstances after conclusion of a new contract at BMW Service.

If a Cancellation request is displayed on the Control Display, the emergency call can be cancelled within 5 seconds. In the case of a BMW Assist emergency call, the data required to decide on the rescue measures to be taken are transferred to the emergency call centre, e.g. the current position of your vehicle if this can be determined. > If the situation permits, wait in the vehicle until voice has been established. > If the LED is flashing but the emergency call centre cannot be heard over the hands-free system, it is possible that the hands-free system is malfunctioning. The emergency call centre may still be able to hear you, however. > Cancellation request: emergency call may be terminated within 5 seconds. > If certain requirements are met, an emergency call is automatically initiated after a serious accident. The automatic emergency call will not be hindered by pressing the button.


Warning triangle*

Overview

For technical reasons, the emergency call function cannot be ensured in certain unfavourable conditions.<

Mobile Service

First-aid pouch*

Notes If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started with the battery of another vehicle using two jump start leads. Use only leads with fully insulated terminal clamps. Do not depart from the procedure described below, otherwise personal injury could result or one or both vehicles be damaged. Do not touch any electrically live parts when the engine is running, or a fatal accident may occur.<

Preparation

The first-aid pouch is located on the right-hand side of the luggage area in a storage compartment.

1. Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volt and approximately the same capacitance in Amp/h. Details are stated on the battery. 2. Switch off the engine of the donor vehicle. 3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.

Regularly check the use-by date and, if necessary, replace in due time.

The bodies of the two vehicles must not make , otherwise there is the risk of a short-circuit.<


Reference

Mobility

The durability of some items is limited.

Driving hints

Jump-starting

Navigation

A direct connection to Mobile Service can be established using the Assist information service, see page 181. This enables you to call breakdown assistance, see page 182.

Entertainment

Breakdown assistance using BMW Assist

On the inside of the tailgate. To remove, press on the tab, arrow.

Communication

The brochure contains a list of the numbers to call for Mobile Service.

Controls

In many countries Mobile Service is available by phone twenty-four hours a day, seven days a week. This service can render assistance in the event of a breakdown.


Jump starting connections Connect the jump leads in the correct order to avoid sparks that could cause injury.<

5. Connect the second terminal clamp on the negative jump lead to the negative battery terminal or an earth connection on the engine or body of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine Do not use any spray products sold as starting aids. 1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and let in run for a few minutes with increased idling speed. The diesel engine must warm up for approx. 10 minutes. The so-called jump start connection in the engine compartment serves as positive battery terminal. Pull the cover off in an upward direction.

2. Start the engine of the other vehicle as usual. If an initial attempt to start the engine fails, wait several minutes until the flat battery has been recharged to a slightly greater degree. 3. Let both engines run for a few minutes. 4. Disconnect the jump leads in the opposite order from that in which they were originally attached. If necessary, check the battery and have it recharged.

The vehicle body earthing or a special nut serves as negative terminal.

Tow-starting, towing away

Connect leads

Using the towing eye

1. Remove the cap of the BMW jump start connection. 2. Connect a terminal clamp on the positive jump lead to the positive battery terminal or a jump-starting connection on the donor vehicle. 3. Connect a second terminal clamp on the positive terminal of the battery or on the corresponding jump starting connection of the receiving vehicle. 4. Connect a terminal clamp on the negative jump lead to the negative battery terminal or the engine or body earth connection on the donor vehicle.

The screw-in towing eye must always be carried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW. It is located in the on-board toolkit in the storage compartment underneath the floor , see page 207. Use only the towing eye supplied with the vehicle, and make sure that it is screwed in fully and is tight. Only use the towing eye for towing on roads. Avoid lateral loads on the towing eye, e.g. do not raise the vehicle at the towing eye. Otherwise, the towing eye and the vehicle could be damaged.<


lights, turn indicators and windscreen wipers would not be available. > Do not tow the vehicle by lifting the rear axle, otherwise the steering may be turned.

Overview

Screw thread

The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may be impossible to maintain control.< Attach the towbar or towrope to the towing eyes only. Attaching these to other parts of the vehicle may result in damage.< If the vehicle's electrical system fails, do not attempt a tow, otherwise you will not be able to release the electrical steering wheel lock and steer the vehicle.<

Manual gearbox

The towing eyes of both vehicles should be on the same side. If it is impossible to avoid attaching the towbar at an angle, note the following: > Towbar clearance may be restricted when cornering. > The towbar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset.

Towrope Ensure that the towrope is taut when the towing vehicle moves off.

Gearshift lever in idle position.

For towing, use nylon ropes or tapes, as these will help avoid sudden tensile loads.

Automatic gearbox

Only attach the towrope to the towing eye. Attaching the towbar to other parts of the vehicle can result in damage.<

Selector lever in position N Changing selector lever positions, see page 54. Do not exceed a towing speed of 70 km/h or 40 mph and a towing distance of 150 km or 90 miles, otherwise the automatic gearbox could be damaged.<

Mobility

Please observe when towing

Driving hints

Towbar

Navigation

Please observe before towing

Do not raise the vehicle at the towing eye or by body or suspension components, otherwise it could be damaged.<

Entertainment

Towing away

Towing methods

Please observe the information on towing to avoid damage to the vehicle or accidents.< > Make sure that the ignition is switched on, as otherwise low-beam headlights, rear


Reference

Press on the lower section of the cover. The cover is pressed out at the upper edge and can be pulled out.

Communication

> Switch on the hazard warning light according to national regulations.

Controls

> Servo assistance is not available when the engine is not running. The steering and brakes will require extra effort to operate.


Breakdown trucks

Manual gearbox 1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers, complying with local regulations. 2. Switch on the ignition, see page 50. 3. Engage 3rd gear. 4. Keep the clutch depressed while performing a tow-start, then gradually release the clutch. Press the clutch down fully again as soon as the engine has started.

Have your vehicle transported by a tow truck with a hoisting frame, or hoisted onto a loading platform. Do not raise the vehicle at the towing eye or by body or suspension components, otherwise it could be damaged.<

Tow trucks: xDrive*

5. Halt in a suitable place, remove the towbar or towrope and switch off the hazard warning flashers. 6. Have the vehicle checked.

Automatic gearbox It is not possible to tow-start the engine. Have the cause for the engine-starting problems remedied.

Do not tow your vehicle with xDrive with just the front or rear axle raised; otherwise the wheels can lock up and the transfer box can be damaged.< Do not raise the vehicle at the towing eye or by body or suspension components, otherwise it could be damaged.<

Tow-starting Please observe before tow-start If the vehicle's electrical system fails, do not attempt a tow-start, otherwise you will not be able to release the electrical steering wheel lock and steer the vehicle.< Vehicles with xDrive*: do not activate the Hill Descent Control HDC, see page 79. If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle. Please attempt to jump start the engine, see page 217. 220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

221

Reference


Mobility

Communication

Entertainment

Navigation

Driving hints

Controls

Overview


Reference This section contains technical data, the short commands for the voice control system, and the index, which is your quickest way of finding the information you want.


Technical data

Technical data Dimensions

All sizes in mm. Smallest turning circle dia.: 11.3 m, ; 37 ft; with xDrive: 11.8 m, 38.7 ft. Height with roof-mounted aerial*: 1573 mm, approx. 62 in


> Manual gearbox

kg (lb)

1505 (3318)

–

–

> Automatic gearbox

kg (lb)

1530 (3373)

1675 (3692)

1685 (3715)

> Manual gearbox

kg (lb)

1990 (4387)

–

–

> Automatic gearbox

kg (lb)

2010 (4431)

2180 (4806)

2180 (4806)

Permitted gross weight

Front axle load limit

kg (lb)

915 (2017)

1030 (2271)

1030 (2271)

Rear axle load limit

kg (lb)

1135 (2502)

1180 (2601)

1180 (2601)

Roof load

kg (lb)

75 (165)

75 (165)

75 (165)

Luggage area capacity

litres (cu ft)

420-1350 (14.8 - 47.7)

420-1350 (14.8 - 47.7)

420-1350 (14.8 - 47.7)

X1 sDrive18d

X1 xDrive18d

X1 sDrive20d

Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras > Manual gearbox

kg (lb)

1545 (3406)

1615 (3560)

1565 (3450)

> Automatic gearbox

kg (lb)

1570 (3461)

1650 (3638)

1575 (3472)

Permitted gross weight kg (lb)

2030 (4475)

2120 (4674)

2045 (4508)

> Automatic gearbox

kg (lb)

2055 (4530)

2140 (4718)

2060 (4541)


kg (lb)

940 (2072)

1010 (2227)

940 (2072)


kg (lb)

1155 (2546)

1170 (2579)

1160 (2557)

Roof load

kg (lb)

75 (165)

75 (165)

75 (165)


litres (cu ft)

420-1350 (14.8 - 47.7)

420-1350 (14.8 - 47.7)

420-1350 (14.8 - 47.7)


Overview Reference

Mobility

> Manual gearbox

Controls

Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras

Driving hints

X1 xDrive28i

Navigation

X1 xDrive25i

Entertainment

X1 sDrive18i

Communication

Weights

Technical data

X1 xDrive20d

X1 xDrive23d

Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras > Manual gearbox

kg (lb)

1650 (3638)

–

> Automatic gearbox

kg (lb)

1660 (3660)

1670 (3682)

> Manual gearbox

kg (lb)

2130 (4696)

–

> Automatic gearbox

kg (lb)

2145 (4729)

2160 (4762)


kg (lb)

1010 (2227)

1015 (2238)


kg (lb)

1165 (2568)

1160 (2557)

Roof load

kg (lb)

75 (165)

75 (165)


litres (cu ft)

420-1350 (14.8 - 47.7)

420-1350 (14.8 - 47.7)



unbraked

kg (lb)

750 (1653)

750 (1653)

750 (1653)

braked on gradients up to 12Ξ

kg (lb)

1700 (3748)

2000/1800 (4409/3968)

2000/1800 (4409/3968)


kg (lb)

1700 (3748)

2000/1800 (4409/3968)

2000/1800 (4409/3968)

Trailer nose weight

kg (lb)

80 (176)

80 (176)

80 (176)


kg (lb)

1250 (2756)

1295 (2855)

1295 (2855)

> Manual gearbox

kg (lb)

2070 (4564)

–

–

> Automatic gearbox

kg (lb)

2090 (4608)

2260 (4982)

2260 (4982)

X1 sDrive18d

X1 xDrive18d

X1 sDrive20d


Values after the / are for vehicles with the 'variant for hot countries' optional extra

Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain countries. Your Service has more information about possible heights. unbraked

kg (lb)

750 (1653)

750 (1653)

750 (1653)


kg (lb)

1800 (3968)

1800 (3968)

1800 (3968)


kg (lb)

1800 (3968)

1800 (3968)

1800 (3968)

Trailer nose weight

kg (lb)

80 (176)

80 (176)

80 (176)


kg (lb)

1270 (2800)

1285 (2833)

1275 (2811)

Permitted gross weight kg (lb)

2110 (4652)

2200 (4850)

2125 (4685)

> Automatic gearbox

kg (lb)

2135 (4707)

2220 (4894)

2140 (4718)


Overview Reference

Mobility

> Manual gearbox

Controls

Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain countries. Your Service has more information about possible heights.

Driving hints

X1 xDrive28i

Navigation

X1 xDrive25i

Entertainment

X1 sDrive18i

Communication

Towing a trailer

Technical data

X1 xDrive20d

X1 xDrive23d

Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain countries. Your Service has more information about possible heights. unbraked

kg (lb)

750 (1653)

750 (1653)


kg (lb)

2000 (4409)

2000 (4409)


kg (lb)

2000 (4409)

2000 (4409)

Trailer nose weight

kg (lb)

80 (176)

80 (176)


kg (lb)

1280 (2822)

1275 (2811)

> Manual gearbox

kg (lb)

2210 (4872)

–

> Automatic gearbox

kg (lb)

2225 (4905)

2240 (4938)


Filling capacities Litres (cu ft) Fuel tank

Note Fuel grade: page 192

> Petrol engine

approx. 63 (13.9 gal)

> Diesel engine

approx. 61 (13.4 gal)

including a reserve of > Petrol engine

approx. 8 (1.8 gal)

> Diesel engine

approx. 6.5 (1.4 gal)

Window washer system including headlight washers

Further details: page 58 approx. 6 (10.6 pt)


Overview

For Australia/New Zealand Engine data

2996

4

6

kW

110

160

rpm

6400

6100

Number of cylinders Max. power output at engine speed Max. torque

Nm

200

280

at engine speed

rpm

3600

2500

X1 sDrive20d

X1 xDrive20d

X1 xDrive23d

1995

1995

1995

4

4

4

Displacement

cc

Number of cylinders

130

130

150

rpm

4000

4000

4400

Max. torque

Nm

350

350

400

at engine speed

rpm

1750-3000

1750-3000

2000-2250

Mobility

Communication

kW

at engine speed


Reference

Max. power output

Driving hints

X1 xDrive25i

1995

Navigation

X1 sDrive18i cc

Entertainment

Displacement

Controls

The rated power is determined with fuel quality RON 98.

For Australia/New Zealand

Performance data The nominal values for performance data are determined with fuel quality RON 98. X1 sDrive18i

X1 xDrive25i

Top speed > Manual gearbox

km/h

202

–

> Automatic

km/h

200

205

> with high-speed setup*

km/h

–

223

Acceleration from 0 to 100 km/h > Manual gearbox

s

9.7

–

> Automatic

s

10.4

7.9

> Manual gearbox

s

31.0

–

> Automatic

s

31.9

28.6

X1 sDrive20d

X1 xDrive20d

X1 xDrive23d

205

205

–

Standing start kilometre

Top speed > Manual gearbox

km/h

> Automatic

km/h

205

205

205

> with high-speed setup*

km/h

218

213

223

> Manual gearbox

s

8.1

8.4

–

> Automatic

s

8.3

8.6

7.3

> Manual gearbox

s

28.8

29.5

–

> Automatic

s

29.3

29.7

28.2

Acceleration from 0 to 100 km/h

Standing start kilometre


X1 xDrive25i

Urban > Manual gearbox

litres/100 km

11.3

–

> Automatic

litres/100 km

11.5

12.9

> Manual gearbox

litres/100 km

6.4

–

> Automatic

litres/100 km

6.6

7.2

> Manual gearbox

litres/100 km

8.2

–

> Automatic

litres/100 km

8.4

9.3

> Manual gearbox

grams/km

191

–

> Automatic

grams/km

195

217

X1 xDrive20d

X1 xDrive23d

Extra-urban

Overview

X1 sDrive18i

Controls

Fuel consumption, carbon dioxide/Θ emissions

> Manual gearbox

litres/100 km

6.4

7.0

–

> Automatic

litres/100 km

7.1

7.7

7.8

> Manual gearbox

litres/100 km

4.7

5.1

–

> Automatic

litres/100 km

5.2

5.4

5.5

> Manual gearbox

litres/100 km

5.3

5.8

–

> Automatic

litres/100 km

5.9

6.2

6.3

> Manual gearbox

grams/km

139

153

–

> Automatic

grams/km

155

164

167

Extra-urban

Combined


Reference

Mobility

Ο emissions

Navigation

Urban

Entertainment

X1 sDrive20d

Communication

Ο emissions

Driving hints

Combined

Short commands for the voice control system

Short commands for the voice control system* Short commands enable you to perform certain functions directly, irrespective of which menu

item is selected. Here you will find important short commands for the voice control system.

Practical short commands Function

Command

Calling up music collection

{Music collection}

Calling up tone

{Tone}

Calling up settings

{Settings}

Calling up on-board computer

{On board computer}

Calling up s*

{s}

Displaying phone book*

{Phonebook}

Calling up services*

{Services}

Calling up BMW Services*

{B M W Services}

Calling up home address*

{Home address}

Calling up destination input*

{Destination input}

Calling up route guidance*

{Guidance}

CD/Multimedia CD/DVD player Function

Command

Playback CD

{C D on}

Selecting CD

{Select C D}

Selecting a CD and track

{C D … track …} e.g. CD 3, track 5

Selecting a track

{C D track …} e.g. track 5

Calling up the CD and Multimedia menu

{C D and multimedia}

CD and DVD*

{C D}

Displaying entertainment details in split screen*

{Entertainment details}


Calling up music collection

{Music collection}

Playback music collection

{Music collection on}

Finding music, calling up menu

{Music search}

Playing most frequently played tracks

{Top fifty}

Controls

Command

{Current playback}

Function

Command

Calling up external devices

{External devices}

Driving hints

External devices

TV Function

Command

Calling up TV

{T V}

Command

Calling up tone

{Tone}

Entertainment

Function

Navigation

Tone

Radio FM Function

Command

Calling up radio

{Radio}

Calling up FM stations

{F M}

Calling up manual search

{Manual search}

Calling up a frequency

{Frequency … megahertz} e.g. 93.5 Megahertz or frequency 93.5

Selecting a frequency range

{Select frequency}

Calling up a station

{Select station} e.g. Bayern 3

Communication

Function

Calling up current playback

Overview

Music collection

Function

Command

Calling up AM stations

{A M}

Calling up manual search

{Manual search}

Calling up a frequency

{Frequency … kilohertz} e.g. frequency 753 Kilohertz or 753 Kilohertz 233


Reference

Mobility

AM


DAB Function

Command

Calling up digital radio

{D A B}

Switching on digital radio

{D A B on}

Memorised stations Function

Command

Calling up saved stations

{Saved stations}

Choosing a stored station

{Select saved station}

Selecting a stored station

{Saved station …} e.g. memorised station 2

Phone Function

Command

Calling up the 'Telephone' menu

{Telephone}

Displaying phone book

{Phonebook}

Redialling

{Redial}

Displaying incoming calls

{Received calls}

Dialling a phone number

{Dial number}

Displaying list of messages

{Messages}

Displaying Bluetooth devices

{Bluetooth}

Navigation General Function

Command

Navigation menu

{Navigation}

Calling up destination input

{Destination input}

Entering an address

{Destination input}

Calling up route guidance

{Guidance}


{Start guidance}

Exiting route guidance

{Stop guidance}

Calling up home address

{Home address}

Calling up route criteria

{Route criteria}

Calling up course of a route

{Route profile}

Switching on voice messages

{Switch on spoken instructions}

Repeating spoken instruction

{Repeat spoken instructions}


Displaying address book

{Address book}

Displaying last destinations

{Last destinations}

Calling up traffic information

{Traffic information}

Points of interest

{Points of interest}

Overview

Command

{Switch off spoken instructions}

Map Function

Command

Displaying map

{Map}

Map pointing towards north

{Map north oriented}

Map pointing in direction of travel

{Map indicating direction of travel}

Map in perspective

{Map perspective}

Automatic map scaling*

{Map automatic scaling}

Changing the scale

{Map scale}

{Switch off splitscreen}

Adapting split screen

{Split screen display}

Split screen, current position

{Splitscreen current position}

Split screen, map pointing towards north

{Splitscreen map north oriented}

Split screen, pointing in direction of travel

{Splitscreen map direction of travel oriented}

Split screen, perspective

{Splitscreen perspective}

Split screen, cross enlargement

{Splitscreen 3 D exit roads}

Split screen scale ... metres*

{Splitscreen scale … metres} e.g. split screen scale 100 metres

Split screen scale ... kilometres*

{Splitscreen scale … kilometres} e.g. split screen scale 5 kilometres

Split screen, highlight traffic information

{Split screen, Traffic situation}

Split screen, on-board computer

{Splitscreen on board computer}

Split screen, journey computer

{Splitscreen Journey computer}

Scaling split screen automatically

{Splitscreen automatic scaling}


Communication

Switching off split screen

Mobility

Command

{Switch on splitscreen}

Reference

Function

Split screen

Entertainment

Navigation

Split screen* settings

Driving hints

Controls

Function

Switching off voice messages


Route guidance with intermediate destination Function

Command

New destination entry

{Destination input}

Trip list

{Saved journeys}

s Function

Command

Calling up s

{s}

My s

{My s}

New

{New }

BMW Services Function

Command

Calling up BMW Services*

{B M W Services}

Calling up BMW Online*

{B M W Online}

Calling up the Internet*

{Internet}

Vehicle info Function

Command

Calling up on-board computer

{On board computer}

Calling up the journey computer

{Journey computer}

Calling up vehicle info

{Vehicle information}

Calling up the vehicle status

{Vehicle status}

Settings Vehicle Function

Command

Calling up the main menu

{Main menu}

Calling up settings

{Settings}

Calling up options

{Options}

Control Display settings

{Control display}

Calling up time and date

{Clock and Date}

Calling up language and units

{Language and units}


Command

{Speed}

Calling up lights

{Lights}

Calling up door locking

{Door locks}

Overview

Function

Calling up limit speed

Command

{Climate}


Reference

Mobility

Communication

Entertainment

Navigation

Driving hints

Function

Calling up climate

Controls

Equipment

Maintenance overview

Maintenance overview The BMW maintenance system informs you regarding the current service requirements, see page 202.

The following overview provides information on which maintenance tasks are carried out at the individual service appointments.

Standard schedule Maintenance work

Petrol

Diesel

Examine Check Control alerts

+

+

Examine indicator and warning lamps

+

+

Engine oil Petrol

Diesel

Replace engine oil and oil filter

Maintenance work

+

+

Handbrake: Check function of brake engagement

+

+

Air conditioning system or automatic air conditioning system: For a separate charge: replace the microfilter

+

+

With every 2nd engine oil change: For a separate charge: replace spark plugs

+

With every 2nd engine oil change: Intake muffler: For a separate charge: replace air filter element; with heavier dust deposit, reduce change interval

+

+

With every 2nd engine oil change:

+

For a separate charge: replace the fuel filter, with lower fuel grades, shorten the replacement interval Reset service display in line with workshop guideline


+

+

Petrol

Diesel

Replace brake pads, clean brake shafts

+

+

Brake discs: Check surface and thickness. Replace if necessary, for a separate charge

+

+

Reset service display in line with workshop guideline

+

+

Petrol

Diesel

Replace brake pads, clean brake shafts

+

+

Brake discs: Check surface and thickness. Replace if necessary, for a separate charge

+

+

Handbrake: Check condition, brake pad thickness and function. Replace if necessary, for a separate charge

+

+


+

+

Petrol

Diesel

Replace brake fluid

+

+


+

+

Overview

Maintenance work

Controls

Front brakes

Vehicle check Petrol

Diesel

Check horn, headlight flasher and hazard warning system

Maintenance work

+

+

Check instrument/indication field lighting and heater blower

+

+

Check lighting system

+

+

Seat belts: Check condition of the seat belt strap, function of roller mechanism, belt interlock and belt buckle

+

+

Check windscreen wiper and washer system

+

+


Navigation Entertainment Communication

Maintenance work

Mobility

Brake fluid

Reference

Maintenance work

Driving hints

Rear brakes

Maintenance overview

Petrol

Diesel

Tyres: Check tread depth, running pattern, external condition and inflation pressure; correct inflation pressure if necessary

Maintenance work

+

+

Initialising the Run Flat Indicator

+

+

BMW Mobility System*: Check the expiry date on the sealant bottle. Replace the sealant bottle if necessary, for a separate charge

+

+

Battery with status indicator*: Check the battery. For a separate charge: recharge if necessary

+

+

Check the coolant level and concentration, top up if necessary

+

+

Windscreen washing unit: Check fluid level, top up if necessary; if required with addition of anti-freeze for a separate charge

+

+

Brake lines and connections: Check for leak-tightness, damage and correct position

+

+

Underbody, including all visible parts: Check for damage, corrosion, leak-tightness, including leaktightness of shock absorbers and fitting (rebound - compression)

+

+

Steering oil container*: Check oil level, top up if necessary for a separate charge

+

+

Steering components: Check clearance, leak-tightness*, damage and wear

+

+

+

+

+

+

Check of road safety, test drive: > Brakes > Steering > Shock absorbers > Gearbox Reset service display in line with workshop guideline


241

Reference


Mobility

Communication

Entertainment

Navigation

Driving hints

Controls

Overview

From A to Z

From A to Z Index A ABS Anti-lock Brake System 78 Acceleration, see Vehicle performance 230 Accessories 6 Accident, see Making an emergency call 216 Activated charcoal filter for automatic air-conditioning system 94 Activating BMW Assist 182, 187 Activating TeleServices 186 Adaptive brake light, see Dynamic brake lights 83 Adaptive Head Light 87 Additives – coolant 201 – engine oil 200 Address for navigation entering 119 Adjusting the tone for audio mode, see Tone settings 138 Adjusting thigh 38 Adjusting units of measure on the Control Display 65 Aerial for the mobile phone 166 AHL, see Adaptive Head Light 87 Airbags 83 – deactivating 85 – indicator/warning light 84 – indicator light for front enger airbags 85 – reactivating 85 Airbag switch, see Keyswitch for front enger airbags 85

Air conditioning mode – automatic air-conditioning system 91 – ventilation 93 Air conditioning system 91 Air distribution – automatic 92 Air flow rate 92 Air pressure, see Tyre pressure 193 Air recirculation, see Recirculated-air mode 92 Air supply – automatic air-conditioning system 91 – ventilation 93 Alarm system 31 – avoiding false alarms 32 – interior movement detector 32 – switching off alarm 32 – tilt alarm sensor 32 Album information for music 158 Albums for music collection 157 Alloy wheels 205 ALL programme 93 All-season tyres, see Winter tyres 195 All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 79 Ambient air, see Recirculatedair mode 92 Anti-freeze – coolant 201 – washer fluid 58 Anti-lock Brake System ABS 78 Anti-theft alarm system, see Alarm system 31 Approved engine oils 200 Aquaplaning 110

Armrest, see Centre armrest 98 Arrival time, see Computer 63 Ashtray 100 AUC Automatic Air Recirculation Control 92 Audio 138 – controls 138 – switching on/off 138 – tone settings 138 – volume 138 Audio device, external 98 Automatic – air distribution 92 – air flow control 92 – cruise control 59 – driving lights control 86 Automatic air-conditioning system 91 – automatic air distribution 92 Automatic Air Recirculation Control AUC 92 Automatic DAB/FM switchover 146 Automatic-dim mirrors 43 Automatic gearbox with Steptronic 54 – interlock 54 – overriding selector lever lock 56 – shiftlock, see Changing selector lever positions 54 Automatic high beams and low beams, see High-Beam Assistant 88 Automatic low-beam headlights, see High-Beam Assistant 88 Automatic start/stop function 52 Automatic TeleServices call 187



Overview Driving hints Navigation Entertainment

Call – accepting 169 – rejecting 170 – terminating 170 Call up saved trip 127 Camera, see Rear-view camera 75 Can holders, see Drinks holders 99 Capacity – fuel tank, see Filling capacities 228 – luggage area, see Weights 225 Car – battery 214 – loads 111 – stopping 51 – weight 225 Caravan-towing, see Towing a trailer 113 Carbon dioxide, see Ο emissions 231 Care of paintwork 205 Car jack 214 Car key, see Integrated key/ remote control 26 Car phone – installed position, see Centre armrest 98 Car phone, see Telephone 166 Car radio, see Radio 141 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust system 110 CBS Condition Based Service 202 CD, audio playback 148

Controls

C

Communication

Backrest contour, see Lumbar 38 Backrests, see Seats 37 Backrest width adjustment 38 Bar, see Towing methods 219 Bass, tone control 138 Battery 214 – disposal 34, 215 – jump-starting 217 – recharging 214 – remote control 26 – temporary power failure 215 Battery change, remote control for vehicle 34 Battery for the mobile phone 177 Belts, see Seat belts 41 Belt tensioner, see Seat belts 41 Biodiesel, see Diesel engine 192 Blower, see Air flow control 92 BMW Online 183 BMW Assist 181 BMW homepage 4 BMW Maintenance System 202

Button for starting the engine, see Start/stop button 50 Buttons on the steering wheel 11

Mobility

B

BMW Mobility System 212 – compressor 212 – continuing the trip 214 – correct tyre inflation pressure 213 – distributing sealant 213 – filling with sealant 213 – sealant 212 BMW Services 181 BMW TeleServices 181, 187 BMW web page 4 Bottle holders, see Drinks holders 99 Brake discs 111 – brakes 108 – running in 108 Brake fluid, see Next Service indicator 66 Brake lights – bulb changing 210 – Dynamic brake lights 83 Brake pads 108 – running in 108 Brakes 108 – ABS 78 – BMW Maintenance System 202 – Dynamic brake lights 83 – handbrake 53 – Next Service indicator 66 – running in 108 Brakes, see Safe braking 110 Brake system – BMW Maintenance System 202 – disc brakes 111 – running in 108 Braking assistant 78 Breakdown recovery 182 Breakdown Service, see Mobile Service 217 Bridging, see Jumpstarting 217 Brightness of the Control Display 72 Bulb replacement, see Replacing lamps and bulbs 207

Reference

AUTO program for automatic air-conditioning system 92 AUX-IN port 98, 160 Available services 187 Average fuel consumption 63 – adjusting units 65 Average speed 63 Avoiding false alarms 32 Avoiding motorways in navigation 129 Axle load limits, see Weights 225

From A to Z

CD changer 148, 152 – controls 138 – fast forward, rewind 150 – filling or emptying the magazine 153 – random play 149 – selecting track 148 – switching on/off 138 – tone settings 138 – volume 138 CD player 148 – controls 138 – fast forward, rewind 150 – random play 149 – selecting track 148 – switching on/off 138 – tone settings 138 – volume 138 Central locking – from inside 30 – from outside 27 Central locking system 27 – convenient access 33 Centre arm rest – front 98 – rear 98 Centre brake light, bulb changing 211 Centre console, see Around the centre console 14 Changing a wheel 214 Changing trips 127 Chassis number, see Engine compartment 197 Check Control 69 Child restraint systems 45 Child safety 45 Child safety catches 49 Child seat mountings, ISOFIX 46 Child seats, see Child safety 45 Cigarette lighter, see Lighter 100 Cleaning headlights 57 – washer fluid 58 Cleaning the rear window 58

Cleaning the windows 56 – capacity, reservoir 228 – rear window 58 – washer fluid 58 – washer fluid reservoir 58 – washer jets 58 Cleaning your BMW, see General care 204 Clearance warning, see Park Distance Control PDC 73 Clock 61 – 12h/24h format 69 – setting time 68 Clutch, running in 108 Ο emissions 231 Coat hooks 99 Cockpit 10 Cold start, see Starting the engine 51 Combined instrument, see Instrument cluster 12 Comfort/convenience, see Around the centre console 14 Compartment for remote control, see Ignition lock 50 Com 96 Comprehensive information on the roof lining 15 Computer – displays on the Control Display 63 Computer, see iDrive 16, 63 Condensation, see Vehicle parked 111 Condition Based Service CBS 202 Configuring settings, see Personal Profile 26 Confirmation signals for locking/unlocking vehicle 28 Congestion – displaying traffic information 133 – see Avoiding sections of route 130 Connecting a music player, see AUX-IN port 160

Connecting a music player, see USB audio interface 160 Connecting an iPod, see AUXIN port 160 Connecting an iPod, see USB audio interface 160 Connecting an MP3 player, see AUX-IN port 160 Connecting an MP3 player, see USB audio interface 160 Connecting vacuum cleaner, see Connecting electrical appliances 100 Consumption, see Average fuel consumption 63 Consumption display – average consumption 63 Consumption figures, see Fuel consumption 231 Control centre, see iDrive 16 Control Display, see iDrive 16 – brightness adjustment 72 – switching off/on 16 Controller, see iDrive 16 Controls and displays 10 Control unit, see iDrive 16 Convenient access 33 – changing battery 34 Convenient operation – glass roof 28 – windows 28 Coolant 201 – checking level 201 Coolant temperature 61 Cooling, maximum 92 Cooling fluid, see Coolant 201 Cooling function on/off 93 Cooling system, see Coolant 201 Copyright 2 Cornering lights, see Adaptive Head Light 87 Country information using BMW Online 134 Country of destination for navigation 119 Course of route 130 Creating s 178 Cross-hairs for navigation 124



Overview Controls Driving hints Navigation Entertainment Communication

DAB, station scan 145 Dashboard, see Instrument cluster 12 Dashboard lighting, see Instrument lighting 90 Data, technical 229 – consumption 231 – dimensions 224 – engine 229 – filling capacities 228 – performance data 230 – weights 225 Data memory 203 Data transmission 187 Date – date format 69 – setting 69 Daytime driving lights 87 – bulb changing 209 Deactivating/activating Bluetooth connection 168 Deadlocking, see Locking 28 Deadlocks 27 Defrosting windows 93 Defrost windscreen, see Defrosting windows 93 Deleting a trip 127 Designation, run-flat tyres 195 Destination address – entering 119, 125

Door key, see Remote control with integrated key 26 Door lock 29 Doors, manual operation 29 Doors, unlocking and locking – confirmation signals 28 – from inside 30 – from outside 28 Downhill gradients 111 Draught-free ventilation 94 Drawbar load, see Nose weight 113 Drinks holders 99 Drive-off assistant 80 Driver assistance systems, see Driving stability control systems 78 Driving hints 108 Driving lights, see Side lights/ low-beam headlights 86 Driving lights control, automatic 86 Driving on poor road surfaces 115 Driving on right 111 Driving stability control systems 78 Driving through water 110 Dry air, see Cooling function 93 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 78 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 78 – indicator/warning light 78 DVD – country codes 150 – settings 151 – video playback 150 DVD country codes 150 DVD menu 151 DVD player, see CD player 148 DVD video 150 Dynamic brake lights 83 Dynamic route guidance 130 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 78 – indicator/warning light 78

Mobility

D

Destination in navigation – entering 119 – entering manually 119 – entering via map 124 – entering via voice commands 125 – home address 122 Destination input using BMW Assist 123 Dialling a phone number 170 Diesel fuel 192 Diesel particle filter 110 Difficulty starting, see Jump starting 217 Digital clock 61 Digital com 96 Digital radio DAB 145 Dimensions 224 Dipstick, engine oil 198 Direction indicators, see Flashing turn indicators 56 Direction instructions, see Voice instructions 131 Directory in navigation, see Address book 121 Displacement, see Engine data 229 Display, see iDrive controls 16 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 90 Display points of interest 124 Displays, see Instrument cluster 12 Displays and controls 10 Displays on the Control Display 16 Disposal – battery for remote control 34 – car battery 215 – coolant 201 Dispose of old battery 215 Distance remaining, see Remaining operating range 63 Distance remaining to service, see Next Service indicator 66 Door entry lighting, see Interior lights 90

Reference

Cruise control 59 – malfunction 60 Cup holders, see Drinks holders 99 Current fuel consumption 62 Currently playing – external devices 162 Current playback – for music collection 157 Cylinders, see Engine data 229

From A to Z

Dynamic Traction Control DTC 78 – indicator/warning light 79

E EBV Electronic Brake Force Distribution 78 Eject button, see Buttons on CD/DVD player 138 Electrical fault – door lock 29 – driver's door 29 – fuel filler flap 190 – tailgate 31 Electric seat adjustment 38 Electric steering wheel lock 50 – with convenient access 33 Electric windows, see Windows 34 Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBV 78 Electronic oil level check 198 Electronic Stabilisation Program ESP, see Dynamic Stability Control DSC 78 Emails from BMW Online 173 Emergency call 216 Emergency operation – automatic gearbox, see Overriding selector lever lock 56 – door lock, see Manual operation 29 – fuel filler flap, manual release 190 Emergency Service, see Mobile Service 217 Ending a call 170 Energy-saving driving style, see Current fuel consumption 62

Engine – Data 229 – overheated, see Coolant temperature 61 – rpm 229 – running in 108 – starting 51 – starting, convenient access 33 – stopping 51 Engine compartment 197 Engine compartment lid 197 Engine coolant, see Coolant 201 Engine oil – adding 200 – additives, see Approved engine oils 200 – alternative oil grades 200 – approved engine oils 200 – BMW Maintenance System 202 – checking level 198 – dipstick 198 – filling capacity 228 – intervals between changes, see Next Service indicator 66 Engine power, see Engine data 229 Engine speed, see Engine data 229 Engine start, see Starting the engine 51 Entering a destination by town or city name 119 Entering a junction for navigation 120 Entering an address for navigation 119, 125 Entering a street for navigation 120 Entering a town/city for navigation 119 Entering points of interest by name 123 Enter post code for navigation 120

Environmentally-friendly driving style, see Current fuel consumption 62 Equaliser, tone control 139 ESP Electronic Stabilisation Program, see Dynamic Stability Control DSC 78 Exhaust system, see Hot exhaust system 110 Expanding the luggage area 101 Extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone 160 External audio device 98 External devices, random playback 162 Eyes – for lashing loads 112 – for tow-starting and towing away 218

F Failure messages, see Check Control 69 Failure of an electrical consumer 215 False alarm – avoiding false alarms 32 – switching off alarm 32 Fasten seat belts, see Seat belts 41 Fastest route in navigation 129 Fast forward – CD changer 150 – CD player 150 Fast rewind – CD changer 150 – CD player 150 Fault – automatic gearbox with Steptronic 56 – door lock 29 – fuel filler flap 190 – tailgate 31 – tyres 81


H Halogen headlight, bulb changing 209 Halogen headlights – bulb changing 209 – driving on left/right 111 – manual beam throw adjustment 88 Handbrake 53 – indicator light 53 Hands-free unit 14 Hazard warning flashers 14, 216 HDC Hill Descent Control 79 Head-level airbags 83 247


Overview Controls Driving hints Navigation Entertainment

Garage door opener, see Integrated universal remote control 95 Gearbox – automatic gearbox with Steptronic 54 – manual gearbox 54 – overriding selector lever lock for automatic gearbox with Steptronic 56 Gearbox interlock – see Changing selector lever positions 54 – see P Park 54 Gear indicator, automatic gearbox with Steptronic 54 Gearshift lever – automatic gearbox with Steptronic 54 – manual gearbox 54 Gearshift point display 64

Communication

G

Gearshifts – automatic gearbox with Steptronic 54 – manual gearbox 54 General care 204 – alloy wheels 205 – care products 204 – carpets 206 – chrome parts 205 – displays 206 – fine wood trims 205 – headlights 204 – high-pressure cleaners 204 – leather 205 – paintwork 205 – plastic parts 205 – rubber seals 205 – seat belts 206 – upholstery and fabric trims 205 General driving notes 109 Glass roof, electric – convenient operation 28, 29 – remote control 28 Glove box 98 GPS navigation, see Navigation system 118 Gross weight, see Weights 225 Ground lights, see Interior lights 90 Guided tours 127

Mobility

Fuel 192 – additives 192 – average consumption 63 – consumption 231 – gauge 62 – grade 192 – see Average fuel consumption 63 – see Fuel grade 192 – tank capacity, see Filling capacities 228 Fuel, adding 190 Fuel consumption display – current fuel consumption 62 Fuel display, see Fuel gauge 62 Fuel filler flap 190 – unlocking in the event of an electrical fault 190 Fuel level 62 Fuel saving driving style, see Current fuel consumption 62 Fuses 215

Reference

Fault messages, see Check Control 69 Filling capacities 228 Filter – see Microfilter/activated charcoal filter for automatic air-conditioning system 94 Filtering traffic information 133 First-aid pouch 217 Fixture for remote control, see Ignition lock 50 Fixture for telephone or mobile phone – see Snap-in adapter in centre armrest storage compartment 98 Flashing turn indicators 56 – bulb changing 210 Flashing when locking/ unlocking 28 Floods, see Driving through water 110 Floor – folding up 104 – raising 104 Fog lights 89 – indicator light 13, 89 Folding in mirrors, before entering a car wash 43 Folding rear seat backrest 101 Footbrake, see Safe braking 110 Footwell lights, see Interior lights 90 For your own safety 5 Four-wheel-drive, see xDrive 79 Free capacity, music collection 159 Front airbags 83 Front enger airbags – deactivating 85 – reactivating 85 Frost protection – coolant 201 – washer fluid 58

From A to Z

Headlight beam throw adjustment 88 – automatic, xenon headlights 88 Headlight courtesy delay feature 87 Headlight flasher 56 – indicator light 10, 13 Headlights, bulb changing 209 Head restraints 39 – adjusting the height 39 – removing 39 Heating – mirrors 43 – rear window 93 – seats 39 Heating and ventilation, see Climate 91 Heavy loads, see Loading 112 Height, see Dimensions 224 Height adjustment – seats 37 – steering wheel 43 High-Beam Assistant 88 High-beam headlights 88 – bulb changing 209 – headlight flasher 88 – indicator light 13 High beams and low beams, automatic, see High-Beam Assistant 88 High pressure cleaning jets 204 Hill Descent Control HDC 79 Hints for driving, see Driving hints 108 Holder for telephone or mobile – phone, see Snap-in adapter 177 Holders for drinks 99 Horn 10, 11 Hot exhaust system 110 Hotline 186 Hydraulic braking assistant 78

I Ice warning, see Outside temperature warning 61 Icy roads, see Outside temperature warning 61 iDrive 16 – adjusting brightness 72 – changing language 72 – changing settings 72 – changing the time 68 – changing units of measure and form of expression 65 – controls 16 – menu guidance 17 – operating principle 16 – overview 16 – start menu 17 – status information 19 Ignition 50 – switched off 51 – switched on 50 Ignition key, see Remote control with integrated key 26 Ignition key position 1, see Radio ready state 50 Ignition key position 2, see Ignition on 50 Ignition lock 50 Importing trips 127 Imprint 2 Indicator and warning lights 13 Inflation pressures, see Tyre pressure 193 Information service 181 Initialising – after power failure 215 – com, see Calibrating 97 – panorama glass roof 36 – radio, see Memorising stations 141 – Run Flat Indicator RPA 81 Input map for destination 124 Inside mirror 43 – automatic-dim 43 – com 96

Installation location, telephone 98 Instructions from navigation system, see Voice messages 131 Instrument cluster 12 Instrument lighting 90 Instrument , see Cockpit 10 Integrated key 26 Integrated universal remote control 95 Interactive map 125 Interior lights 90 – remote control 28 Interior movement detector 32 Interlock, see Taking out the remote control 54 Intermittent wiper operation 57 Internet 184 Internet site, BMW 4 ISOFIX child seat mountings 46

J Jack – mounting points 214 Jacking points 214 Journey computer, see Displays on the Control Display 63 Joystick, see iDrive 16 Jump-starting 217

K Kerb weight, see Weights 225 Key, see Integrated key/ remote control 26 Keyless Go, see Convenient access 33 Keyless locking and unlocking, see Convenient access 33 Key Memory, see Personal Profile 26


M M+S tyres, see Winter tyres 195



Language, changing on the Control Display 72 Lap-and-shoulder belt, see Seat belts 41 Lashings, see Securing the load 112 Last destinations 122 Laying up out of use 206 Leather care 205 LED light-emitting diodes 208 Length, see Dimensions 224 Licence plate light, bulb changing 211 Light-emitting diodes LED 208 Lighter 100 – connecting electrical appliances 100 Lighting – instruments 90 – replacing lamps and bulbs 207 – vehicle, see Lights 86 Lights – automatic driving lights control 86 – High-Beam Assistant 88 – side lights/low-beam headlights 86 Light switch 86 Limit, see Speed limit 71 Load 111 Load area, see Luggage area 101 Loads – car 111 – loading 112 – securing 112 – trailer 113

Maintenance system 202 Manual gearbox 54 Manual mode – selector lever lock, automatic gearbox 56 Manual operation – door lock 29 – driver's door 29 – fuel filler flap 190 – luggage compartment lid/ tailgate 31 Manual operation, automatic gearbox with Steptronic 55 Map for navigation – changing scale 132, 133 – destination input 124 Map view 131 Masking film, see Rule of the road 111 Master key, see Remote control with integrated key 26 Maximum cooling 92 Maximum speed – with trailer 114 – with winter tyres 195 Measurements, see Dimensions 224 Memorising the seat position, see Seat and mirror memory 40 Memory, see Seat and mirror memory 40 MENU button 16 Menus, see iDrive 16 Message from information service 173 Messages 172 Microfilter – BMW Maintenance System 202 – for automatic airconditioning system 94 Microphone – telephone 14 – voice control 14

Mobility

L

Load-securing equipment, see Securing the load 112 Lockable wheel studs, see Theft-proof wheel studs 214 Locking – adjusting confirmation signal 28 – from inside 30 – from outside 28 – without remote control, see Convenient access 33 Longlife oils – alternative oil grades 200 – approved engine oils 200 Low-beam headlights 86 – automatic 86 – bulb changing 209 – headlight beam throw adjustment 88 Low fuel level, see Fuel gauge 62 Low fuel level warning light 62 Luggage area 101 – capacity 225 – convenient access 33 – folding up the floor 104 – light, see Interior lights 90 – opening from inside 30 – opening from outside 31 – partition net 102 Luggage area net, see Partition net 102 Luggage compartment – cover 101 Luggage compartment lid, see Tailgate 30 Luggage rack – rear luggage rack 113 – roof rack 112 Luggage rack, see Roof rack 112 Lumbar 38

Reference

Keyswitch for front enger airbags 85 Kick-down 55 – automatic gearbox with Steptronic 55 Knock control 192

From A to Z

Mirrors 42 – heating 43 – inside mirror 43 – mirror memory, see Seat and mirror memory 40 – outside mirrors 42 – parking position function 43 Mobile phone – adjusting volume 169 – connecting, see Logging on a mobile phone 166 – installed position, see Centre armrest 98 – logging on 166 – operation via iDrive 169 Mobile phone, installed position, see Centre armrest 98 Mobile phone, see Telephone 166 Mobile Service 217 Modifications, technical, see For your own safety 5 Monitor, see iDrive controls 16 Motorways, see Route criteria 129 Multichannel playback 139 Multifunctional steering wheel, see Buttons on steering wheel 11 Multi-function switch – see Turn indicator/highbeam headlight/headlight flasher 56 – see Wiper system 56 Multimedia screen, see iDrive 16 Music, managing 158 Music, playing 156 Music collection 155 – backing up 159 – deleting 159 – random playback 158 – restoring 159 Music memory 155 Music search 156 MW waveband 141 My Info 173

N

O

Navigation – memorise current position 121 – starting route guidance after destination input 121 – voice input 125 Navigation announcements, see Switching voice messaging on/off 131 Navigation data 118 Navigation system 118 – address book 121 – adjusting volume 131 – avoiding sections of a route 130 – continuing route guidance 129 – destination input 119 – dynamic route guidance 130 – entering a destination address manually 119 – entering a destination via voice control system 125 – exiting route guidance 129 – planning a journey 126 – points of interest 122 – questions on the system 135 – refuelling recommendations 130 – route list 130 – selecting destination via map 124 – selecting route criteria 129 – starting route guidance 129 – traffic information 133 – voice messages 131 Neck restraints, see Head restraints 39 Nets, see Storage compartments 99 Next Service indicator 66 North, direction of, in map view 131 Nose weight 113, 227 Nozzles, see Ventilation 93 Nylon rope, see Towrope 219

OBD socket, see Socket for on-board diagnosis 203 Octane numbers, see Fuel grade 192 Odometer – distance recorder 61 Oil, see Engine oil 198 Oil consumption 198 Oil level 198 On-board computer, see Computer 63 Opening, see Unlocking 33 Opening and closing – convenient access 33 – from the inside 30 – from the outside 28 – via the door lock 29 – via the remote control 28 Opening the engine compartment lid 197 Operating principle, iDrive 16 Operation on poor road surfaces 115 Orientation menu, see Start menu 17 Outlets, see Ventilation 93 Outside air mode, automatic air conditioning system 92 Outside mirrors 42 – adjusting 42 – automatic-dim 43 – automatic heating 43 – folding in and out 43 – towing a trailer 113 Outside temperature display 61 – changing units of measure 65 – in computer 65 Outside temperature warning 61 Overheated engine, see Coolant temperature 61 Overriding selector lever lock 56



Overview Controls Driving hints Navigation Entertainment

Radio – controls 138 – DAB 145 – memorising stations 141 – regional programmes 142 – selecting waveband 141 – switching on/off 138 – tone settings 138 – traffic reports 143 – volume 138 Radio-control key, see Remote control with integrated key 26 Radio position, see Radio ready state 50 Radio ready state 50 – switched off 51 – switched on 50 Rain sensor 57 Random play – CD changer 149 – CD player 149 Random playback – music collection 158 Random playback, external devices 162 Range 63

Communication

R

Rapeseed methyl ester RME 192 Reading lights 90 Rear fog lights 89 – bulb changing 211 – indicator light 13 Rear light, bulb changing 211 Rear lights 210 – bulb changing 210, 211 Rear luggage rack 113 Rear seat backrest – adjustable 101 – folding 101 Rear seats – adjust backrest inclination 101 – adjusting head restraints 39 – folding 101 – folding backrests 101 Rear-view camera 75 – activation 75 – cleaning 77 – deactivation 75 – displays in the Control Display 77 – driver assistance functions 75 Rear-view mirror, see Mirrors 42 Rear window heating 93 Rear window wiper 58 Rear wiper – replacing wiper blade 207 Reception – quality 142 – radio stations 142 – traffic reports 143 Recirculated-air mode 92 Recirculation of air, see Recirculated-air mode 92 Recycling 203 Refuelling recommendation 130 Regional programmes on radio 142 Releasing – engine compartment lid 197

Mobility

Panorama glass roof 35 – convenient operation 28 – initialising 36 – opening, closing 36 – power failure 36 – raising 35 – remote control 28 – trap protection 36 Park Distance Control PDC 73 Parking aid – see Park Distance Control PDC 73 – see Rear-view camera 75 Parking assistant, see Park Distance Control 73 Parking brake, see Handbrake 53 Parking lights 88 – bulb changing 209 Parking position function 43 Particle filter, see Diesel particle filter 110 Partition net 102 Parts and accessories 6 enger-side mirror tiltdown 43 PDC Park Distance Control 73 Performance data 230 Personal Profile 26 Petrol, see Fuel grade 192 Petrol consumption, see Fuel consumption 231 Phone 166 Phone book 169 Placing a call, see Dialling a number 170 Placing in storage 206 Plasters, see First-aid pouch 217 Points of interest 122 Pollen – see Microfilter/activated charcoal filter for automatic air-conditioning system 94 Power, see Engine data 229 Power failure 215

Preheating, see Diesel engine 51 Prescribed engine oils, see Approved engine oils 200 Pressure, tyres 193 Pressure monitoring, see Run Flat Indicator 80 Pressure monitoring, tyres 80 – Run Flat Indicator 80 Programmable buttons on steering wheel 11 Protective function, see Trap protection – panorama glass roof 36 – windows 35 Puncture – Run Flat Indicator 80 – run-flat tyres 195

Reference

P

From A to Z

Remote control 26 – changing battery 34 – convenient access 33 – faults 29, 34 – garage door opener 95 – removing from the ignition lock 50 – service data 202 – tailgate 28 Remove headlight cover 208 Repairing a flat tyre 211 Replacement fuses, see Spare fuses 215 Replacement remote control 26 Replacing bulbs, see Replacing lights and bulbs 207 Replacing lamps and bulbs 207 Replacing lights, see Replacing lamps and bulbs 207 Reset, see Resetting tone settings 140 Restraint systems – for children 45 – see Seat belts 41 Returning end-of-life vehicles, see Recycling 203 Reverse gear – automatic gearbox with Steptronic 54 – manual gearbox 54 Reversing lights, bulb changing 210 Revolution counter 61 RME rapeseed methyl ester 192 Road map 131 Roadworthiness test, see Next Service indicator 66 RON, see Fuel grade 192 Roof load 225 Roof rack 112 Rope, see Tow-starting and towing away 219 Rotary/pushbutton control, see iDrive 16

Route 129 – altering criteria 129 – avoiding sections 130 – changing 129, 130 – displaying map view 131 – displaying streets and towns/cities 130 – selecting 129 Route guidance 129 – altering route specifications 129 – avoiding sections of a route 130 – continuing 129 – starting 129 – voice messages 131 – volume of voice messages 131 Route instructions, see Route guidance by voice messages 131 Route map, see Displaying map view 131 Route selection 129 Routine maintenance work, see Service Booklet RPA, see Run Flat Indicator 80 RSC Run-flat System Component, see Run-flat tyres 195 Rule of the road, masking film 111 Run Flat Indicator RPA 80 – indicating a flat tyre 81 – indicator/warning light 81 – initialising the system 81 – snow chains 80 – system limits 80 Run-flat System Component RSC, see Run-flat tyres 195 Run-flat tyres 195 – flat tyre 81 – Run Flat Indicator 81 – tyre pressure 193 – winter tyres 195 Running in 108 Running in the final drive, see Engine and final drive 108

S Safe seated position 37 Safety lock buttons, doors, see Locking 30 Safety switch for rear windows 35 Safety systems – airbags 83 – Anti-lock Brake System ABS 78 – brake system 78 – driving stability control systems 78 – Dynamic Stability Control DSC 78 – seat belts 41 Safety tyres, see Run-flat tyres 195 Saving a trip 127 Saving energy – automatic start/stop function 52 – gearshift point display 64 – saving fuel 108 Saving fuel 108 Scale change in navigation system 132, 133 Screen, see iDrive controls 16 Screw thread for towing eye 219 Seat adjustment – electrical 38 – manual 37 Seat and mirror memory 40 Seat belt height adjustment 42 Seat belt reminder, see 'Fasten seat belts' reminder 42 Seat belts 41 – 'Fasten seat belts' reminder 42 – damage 42 – indicator/warning light 42 Seat heating 39




Speed – when towing a trailer 114 – with winter tyres 195 Speed limit 71 Speedometer 12 Speed volume 139 Split rear seat backrests, see Expanding the luggage area 101 Split screen, see Switching split screen on and off 19 Split screen content, see Select display for split screen content 19 Sport programme, automatic gearbox with Steptronic 55 Spray nozzles, see Cleaning windscreen and headlights 57 Stability control, see Driving stability control systems 78 Start/stop button 50 – starting the engine 51 – switching off the engine 51 Starting on uphill gradients, see Drive-off assistant 80 Starting with a flat battery, see Jump-starting 217 Start menu 17 Stations, see Radio 141 Station scan, DAB 145 Status at time of printing 5 Status information on the Control Display 19 Steam jets 204 Steering wheel 43 – adjustment 43 – buttons on steering wheel 11 – lock 50 – lock, see Electric steering wheel lock 44 – locking with convenient access 33 Steptronic, see Automatic gearbox with Steptronic 54 Stopping – car 51 – engine 51

Mobility

Settings for map view 132 Setting the inside temperature – automatic climate control 91 Shifting gears – automatic gearbox with Steptronic 55 – manual gearbox 54 Shiftlock, automatic gearbox, see Changing selector lever positions 54 Short commands for the voice control system 232 Short route in navigation, see Selecting a route 129 Side airbags 83 Side lights 86 – bulb changing 209 Side lights, bulb changing 209 Side lights/low-beam headlights 86 Side windows, see Window lifts 34 Signal horn, see Horn 10, 11 Sliding/tilt sunroof, see Panorama glass roof 35 Slot for remote control 50 Smokers' package, see Ashtray 100 SMS 173 Snap-in adapter – inserting/removing 177 – use 166 Snap-in adapter, see Centre armrest storage compartment 98 Snow chains 195 Socket, on-board diagnosis OBD 203 Socket, see Connecting electrical appliances 100 Soot particle filter, see Diesel particle filter 110 SOS, see Making an emergency call 216 Sound – middle setting 140 Spare fuses 215

Reference

Seats 37 – adjusting 37 – electrical adjustment 38 – heating 39 – memorising position, see Seat and mirror memory 40 – memory, see Seat and mirror memory 40 – safe seated position 37 Sections of route, changing 130 Securing, vehicle – from inside 30 – from outside 28 Securing the load 112 Selecting a station – DAB 145 – radio 141 Selecting detour 134 Selecting the route 129 Selection options for navigation 129 Selector lever, automatic gearbox with Steptronic 54 Selector lever interlock, see Changing selector lever positions, shiftlock 54 Selector lever positions, automatic gearbox with Steptronic 54 Service, see Mobile Service 217 Service booklet 202 Service car, see Mobile Service 217 Service data in the remote control 202 Service Interval indicator, see Condition Based Service CBS 202 Service partners 187 Service status 187 Settings – clock, 12h/24h format 69 – DVD 151 – language 72 – on the Control Display, changing 72 Settings and information 65

From A to Z

Storage compartments 99 Storage compartment under the floor 104 Storing a destination in the address book 121 Storing tyres 195 Stowage, see Storage compartments 99 Stowage nets 99 Summer tyres, see Wheels and tyres 193 Supply reservoir, see Washer fluid reservoir 58 Surround 139 SVCD 150 Switches, see Cockpit 10 Switch for front enger airbags 85 Switching audio output for entertainment systems on/ off 138 Switching off the engine, see Start/stop button 50 Switching on – audio 138 – CD changer 138 – CD player 138 – radio 138 Switching the engine on, see Start/stop button 50 SW waveband 141 Symbols 4

T Tailgate 30 – convenient access 33 – emergency operation, see Opening manually 31 – opening from inside 30 – opening from outside 31 – opening manually 31 – remote control 28 Tail light, see Rear lights 210 Tank capacity, see Filling capacities 228 Technical data 224 Technical modifications, see For your own safety 5

Telephone – installed position, see Centre armrest 98 – voice input 174 Teleservices call 186 TeleServices diagnosis 182 TeleServices Help 182 Temperature – automatic air-conditioning system 92 – changing unit of measure 65 – coolant, see Coolant temperature 61 Temperature display – outside temperature 61 – outside temperature warning 61 – setting units of measure 65 Tempomat, see Cruise control 59 Tensioning straps, see Securing the load 112 Theft-proof wheel studs 214 Theft protection – for wheel studs, see Theftproof wheel studs 214 Third brake light, see Centre brake light 211 Tilt alarm sensor 32 TMC stations, see Traffic information 133 Tone – settings 138 Toolkit 207 Top 50 for music collection 157 Top speed – see Vehicle performance 230 Torque, see Engine data 229 Towbar 219 Towing away 218, 219 – methods 219 – vehicles with automatic gearbox 219 Towing eye, screw thread 219 Towing eyes 218 Towing eyes for tow-starting and towing away 218

Towrope 219 Tow-starting 218, 220 TP function 143 Track selection on the CD 148 Traction aid, see Dynamic Stability Control DSC 78 Traffic congestion – switching on traffic reports 143 Traffic information, categories 133 Traffic information for navigation 133 – during route guidance 134 Traffic information in navigation – display in map view 133 Traffic reports 143 – Traffic Programme 143 – volume 143 Trailer pulling, see Towing a trailer 113 Trailer Stability Control 114 Trailer towing 113 – towing loads and gross weight 227 Transporting children 45 Transport securing equipment, see Securing the load 112 Trap protection – panorama glass roof 36 – windows 35 Tread depth, see Minimum tread depth 193 Trip distance recorder 61 Triple turn signal 56 Turn indicators – indicator/warning light 12 – triple turn signal 56 Turning circle, see Dimensions 224 Tyre pressure 113, 193 – loss 81 Tyre pressure monitoring, see Run Flat Indicator 80 Tyre puncture, see Run Flat Indicator 81


V VCD 150 Vehicle – identification number, see Engine compartment 197 – measurements, see Dimensions 224 – returning, see Recycling 203 – running in 108

W Warning and indicator lights 13 Warning messages, see Check Control 69 Warning triangle 217 Washer fluid 58 – reservoir capacity 59 Washer fluid reservoir 58 Waste tray, see Ashtray 100 Water on roads, see Driving through water 110 Water penetration 204 Waveband for radio 141

X xDrive 79 Xenon headlights 88 – automatic headlight beam throw adjustment 88 – bulb changing 208 – driving on left/right 111



Units of measure – average fuel consumption 65 – temperature 65 Universal garage door opener, see Integrated universal remote control 95 Universal remote control 95 Unlocking – from inside 30 – from outside 28 – tailgate 33 – without remote control, see Convenient access 33 Updating navigation data 118 USB audio interface 160

Wear indicators in the tyres, see Minimum tread depth 193 Weights 225 Welcome lights 86 Wheelbase, see Dimensions 224 Wheels and tyres 193 Wheelslip control, see Dynamic Stability Control DSC 78 Width, see Dimensions 224 Window lifts 34 – safety switch 35 Windows 34 – convenient operation 28 – opening, closing 34 – safety switch 35 – trap protection 35 Windows, displays on the Control Display 16 Windscreen – cleaning 57 Windscreen wiper blades, changing 207 Winter-grade diesel 192 Winter tyres 195 – speed limit 71 – tyre storage 195 Wiper blades, replacing 207 Wiper system 56 Wordmatch principle for navigation 128 Work in the engine compartment 197 Wrench/screwdriver, see Toolkit 207

Mobility

U

Vehicle battery, see Car battery 214 Vehicle care, see General care 204 Vehicle recycling, see Recycling 203 Ventilation 93 – draught-free 94 Ventilation, see Climate 91 VHF waveband 141 Video menu 150 Video playback 150 Voice, see Route guidance by spoken instructions 131 Voice-activated phone book 175 Voice control – overview 21 – short commands 232 Voice input – telephone 174 Voice messages from navigation system 131 – repeating 131 – switching on/off 131 – volume control 131 Volume 138 – audio sources 138 – mobile phone 169 – traffic reports 143 – voice messages 131

Reference

Tyres – age 194 – changing, see Changing a wheel 214 – condition 193 – damage 194 – minimum tread depth 193 – pressure monitoring, see Run Flat Indicator 80 – pressures 193 – punctures 81 – run-flat 195 – running in 108 – storage 195 – tread 193 – wear indicators, see Minimum tread depth 193 – winter tyres 195 Tyre tread 193

From A to Z

Y Your individual vehicle 5 – settings, see Personal Profile 26



More about BMW

The Ultimate Driving Machine

01 41 2 604 181 En iDrive

www.bmw.com

*BL260418100C* Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

X1 E84 Owners Manual 5131

Overview 5o1f4z

More details 6z3438

Related Documents c2h70

X1 E84 Owners Manual 5131

Projector Infocus X1 Manual s3cu

Francis! Francis! X1 Manual 474l6x

Astm E84 6a3016

Durarara X1 w1h43

Traktor Kontrol X1 Manual Spanish.pdf 682le